CONTACT SOFTWARE

Binary Maker 3
Light Curve Synthesis Program

User Manual
 CONTACT SOFTWARE

Binary Maker 3 User Manual

David H. Bradstreet
David P. Steelman

 2004 Contact Software

725 Stanbridge St., Norristown, PA 19401-5505
Phone 610-279-1940 • Fax 610-341-1549
dbradstr@[Link]

ii
Table of Contents
Acknowledgements................................................................................................................................. xv
Introduction to Binary Maker 3 .................................................................................................................1
Installation ................................................................................................................................................ 5
Hardware Requirements....................................................................................................................... 5
License Key ........................................................................................................................................... 6
Windows 98SE Installation Instructions............................................................................................... 6
Windows 2000/XP Installation Instructions......................................................................................... 7
RedHat Linux Installation Instructions ............................................................................................... 8
Solaris SPARC Installation Instructions ..............................................................................................10
Macintosh OS X Installation Intructions............................................................................................. 11
Windows 98SE Uninstall Instruction...................................................................................................12
Windows 2000/XP Uninstall Instructions ...........................................................................................13
RedHat Linux Uninstall Instructions ..................................................................................................14
Solaris SPARC Uninstall Instructions..................................................................................................15
Macintosh OS X Uninstall Instructions...............................................................................................16
Chapter 1: Brief Overview of Binary Maker 3 ..........................................................................................17
General window names and functions .................................................................................................17
User Input window ..............................................................................................................................19
Binary window .....................................................................................................................................20
Light Curve Plot window .....................................................................................................................20
Radial Velocity Plot window ................................................................................................................21
Chapter 2: Getting Started .......................................................................................................................22
Opening Zip files .................................................................................................................................22
Changing the scale of the plots............................................................................................................26
Rendering the theoretical model..........................................................................................................29
Resizing a plot window........................................................................................................................30
Chapter 3: User Input Dialog Window ....................................................................................................33
Different parameter file types ..............................................................................................................33
Entering parameters manually.............................................................................................................34
Entering spot parameters.....................................................................................................................42
Saving the parameter file (BM3 file) ....................................................................................................47
Saving a Zip file ...................................................................................................................................48
Chapter 4: User Input Dialog Window - More Binary Parameters..........................................................50
Asynchronous rotation .........................................................................................................................50
The Rossiter Effect ..............................................................................................................................53
Double Contact binaries ......................................................................................................................55
Eccentric binary systems .....................................................................................................................56
Chapter 5: User Input Dialog Window - File Menu Options ..................................................................60
Data Table ...........................................................................................................................................60

iii
 PostScript Output ................................................................................................................................62
Settings.................................................................................................................................................68
Restoring Factory Default Setting to Default.......................................................................................................... 71
Chapter 6: User Input Dialog Window - Geometry, Mode and Spots Menus .........................................72
Geometry Menu ...................................................................................................................................72
Mode Menu..........................................................................................................................................74
Making a Star Fill Its Inner Lagrangian Surface...................................................................................................... 75
Spots Menu ..........................................................................................................................................75
Chapter 7: User Input Dialog Window - Tools, Windows and Help Menus...........................................79
Tools Menu ..........................................................................................................................................79
Calculate Radii............................................................................................................................................................... 79
Looping Enabled .......................................................................................................................................................... 82
Output 3D Binary Points (all phases) ....................................................................................................................... 82
Single Step on Start ...................................................................................................................................................... 83
Windows Menu ....................................................................................................................................84
LC and RV Residuals windows.................................................................................................................................. 84
Surface Outlines............................................................................................................................................................ 88
Help Menu ...........................................................................................................................................97
Chapter 8: Light Curve Plot and Radial Velocity Plot Windows ........................................................... 109
Light Curve Plot Window .................................................................................................................. 109
File Menu ..................................................................................................................................................................... 110
Open Data File....................................................................................................................................................... 110
Open phase/magnitude file ................................................................................................................................. 110
Export Synthetic data............................................................................................................................................ 111
PostScript Output.................................................................................................................................................. 111
Edit Menu.................................................................................................................................................................... 112
Graph Properties ................................................................................................................................................... 112
Scale..................................................................................................................................................................... 113
Axis Title............................................................................................................................................................. 121
Tick Labels ......................................................................................................................................................... 122
Tick Marks.......................................................................................................................................................... 125
Coordinate Tag .................................................................................................................................................. 127
Symbols............................................................................................................................................................... 130
General................................................................................................................................................................ 137
Clear Plot Window ......................................................................................................................................... 140
Radial Velocity Plot Window ............................................................................................................. 141
Scaling the Radial Velocity Plot ............................................................................................................................... 141
File Menu ..................................................................................................................................................................... 145
Open Data File....................................................................................................................................................... 146
Open Synthetic RV File........................................................................................................................................ 148
Export Synthetic RV File ..................................................................................................................................... 150
PostScript Output.................................................................................................................................................. 151
Edit Menu.................................................................................................................................................................... 155
Graph Properties ................................................................................................................................................... 155
Scale..................................................................................................................................................................... 156
Axis Title............................................................................................................................................................. 161
Tick Labels ......................................................................................................................................................... 163
Tick Marks.......................................................................................................................................................... 166
Coordinate Tag .................................................................................................................................................. 168
Symbols............................................................................................................................................................... 171
General................................................................................................................................................................ 179
Clear Plot Window ......................................................................................................................................... 182
Chapter 9: Binary 3D Window ............................................................................................................... 184
File Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 185
Export 3D Binary....................................................................................................................................................... 185
PostScript Output ...................................................................................................................................................... 187
Edit Menu .......................................................................................................................................... 189
Display Tab ................................................................................................................................................................. 190
Color Tab..................................................................................................................................................................... 192
Chapter 10: Binary Maker 3 Parameters Explained............................................................................... 198

iv
 Grid Values......................................................................................................................................... 198
Mass Ratio ......................................................................................................................................... 201
Omega Potential ................................................................................................................................ 201
C Potential..........................................................................................................................................202
Fillout Factor......................................................................................................................................203
Fractional Radii .................................................................................................................................206
Setting a Star to Fill Its inner Lagrangian Surface................................................................................................. 207
Effective Wavelength .........................................................................................................................207
Temperature.......................................................................................................................................207
Gravity Brightening ...........................................................................................................................208
Limb Darkening.................................................................................................................................208
Reflection Coefficient ........................................................................................................................209
Luminosity .........................................................................................................................................209
Third Light.........................................................................................................................................209
Inclination..........................................................................................................................................209
Orbital Phase and Normalization Phase ........................................................................................... 210
Normalization Factor......................................................................................................................... 210
Phase Increment ................................................................................................................................ 211
Advanced Phase Increments .................................................................................................................................... 214
Spots................................................................................................................................................... 216
Overlapping Spots...................................................................................................................................................... 218
Umbras and Penumbras ............................................................................................................................................ 218
Longitude of Periastron ..................................................................................................................... 219
Eccentricity ........................................................................................................................................220
Zero Point of Phase............................................................................................................................ 221
Rotation.............................................................................................................................................. 221
Disk ....................................................................................................................................................222
Radial Velocity ...................................................................................................................................226
Chapter 11: Light Curve Analysis...........................................................................................................238
Binary Types ......................................................................................................................................238
Detached Systems....................................................................................................................................................... 238
Semi-Detached Systems ............................................................................................................................................ 239
Near Contact Systems................................................................................................................................................ 240
Contact Systems.......................................................................................................................................................... 241
Overcontact Systems ................................................................................................................................................. 241
Double Contact Systems ........................................................................................................................................... 242
Recognizing Different Light Curve Types.........................................................................................242
GZ CMa....................................................................................................................................................................... 243
EE Peg ......................................................................................................................................................................... 246
NN Cep........................................................................................................................................................................ 247
AI Cru .......................................................................................................................................................................... 248
AS Eri ........................................................................................................................................................................... 249
AK CMi........................................................................................................................................................................ 251
BX And ........................................................................................................................................................................ 252
AD Cnc ........................................................................................................................................................................ 253
AW Lac ........................................................................................................................................................................ 253
SS Ari............................................................................................................................................................................ 254
Light Curve Analysis “Tips”..............................................................................................................255
Asynchronous Systems.......................................................................................................................257
Eccentric Systems ..............................................................................................................................257
V1647 Sgr .................................................................................................................................................................... 258

v
 Single Star Spot Modeling..................................................................................................................262
Chapter 12: Teaching Suggestions ........................................................................................................265
Fundamental Principles to Teach......................................................................................................265
Class Presentation..............................................................................................................................266
Lab Suggestions.................................................................................................................................267
Bibliography ..........................................................................................................................................268
References..............................................................................................................................................270
Appendices ............................................................................................................................................273
Catalog and Atlas of Eclipsing Binaries (CALEB)............................................................................273
Listing of Binary Systems in Zip folder .............................................................................................274
Binary Systems listed alphabetically by constellation ........................................................................................... 274
Binary Systems listed by type.................................................................................................................................... 280
Binary Systems listed by eccentricity....................................................................................................................... 283
Al Naimiy Limb Darkening Tables ...................................................................................................285
Van Hamme Linear Limb Darkening Coefficients ...........................................................................289
Technical Support..............................................................................................................................299
Limitations.........................................................................................................................................299
Errors .................................................................................................................................................300
Limits on the Range of Parameters ......................................................................................................................... 301
Sample BM3 Parameter File ..............................................................................................................303
Sample BM3 nrm File ........................................................................................................................304
BM3 Sample rv file .............................................................................................................................305
Index ......................................................................................................................................................306

vi
List of Figures
Figure 1.1 – User Input window with features named............................................. 17
Figure 1.2 – The four main display windows of Binary Maker 3 ............................ 18
Figure 1.3 – User Input window............................................................................... 19
Figure 1.4 – Binary display window ......................................................................... 19
Figure 1.5 – Light Curve Plot display window.........................................................20
Figure 1.6 – Radial Velocity Plot display window ................................................... 21
Figure 2.1 - User Input Dialog window with File menu opened ............................22
Figure 2.2 – File Open dialog window.....................................................................23
Figure 2.3 – Constellation folders within the Zip folder .........................................24
Figure 2.4 – Eclipsing Binary folder showing the zip files for the systems in Hydra
...........................................................................................................................25
Figure 2.5 – The four display windows after reading in the file [Link] .....26
Figure 2.6 – Resizing box dragged around the light curve data in order to rescale
the plot ...............................................................................................................27
Figure 2.7 - The resulting rescaling of the χ2 Hya y light curve after releasing the
mouse button.....................................................................................................27
Figure 2.8 – Rescaling box drawn around primary eclipse .....................................28
Figure 2.9 – Zoomed in portion of primary eclipse.................................................28
Figure 2.10 – Rescaled radial velocity plot of χ2 Hydrae .........................................29
Figure 2.11 – Phase Control dialog...........................................................................29
Figure 2.12 – Orbit completely rendered for χ2 Hydrae ..........................................30
Figure 2.13 – Maximized y light curve plot of χ2 Hydrae........................................ 31
Figure 3.1 - User Input dialog window with File menu opened .............................33
Figure 3.2 – Latitude and Longitude grid numbers input dialog ...........................35
Figure 3.3 – Omega potentials input dialog ............................................................36
Figure 3.4 – Selecting Fillout mode .........................................................................37
Figure 3.5 – Mass Ratio and Fillout values entered for AE Phe .............................37
Figure 3.6 – Effective Wavelength and Temperatures for AE Phe .........................38
Figure 3.7 – Gravity brightening and limb darkening values for AE Phe ..............39
Figure 3.8 – Reflection coefficients and Third light for AE Phe.............................39
Figure 3.9 – Observer input pane: Inclination for AE Phe and phase settings ......40
Figure 3.10 – AE Phe model after the orbit is completed by pressing the Render
button................................................................................................................. 41
Figure 3.11 – AE Phe V data(red crosshairs) and synthetic light curve (blue
squares) both plotted in Light Curve Plot window ..........................................42
Figure 3.12 – Enable Spots menu choice .................................................................43
Figure 3.13 – Spots Input dialog ..............................................................................43
Figure 3.14 – Values for spot #1 for AE Phe ............................................................44
Figure 3.15 – Add New Spot menu choice...............................................................44
Figure 3.16 – Spot #2 input values for AE Phe ........................................................45
Figure 3.17 – AE Phe synthetic light curve with spots ............................................46
Figure 3.18 – AE Phe as seen at phase 0.75P with two cool starspots ....................46
Figure 3.19 – Maximized and rescaled AE Phe observed (red crosshairs) and
theoretical (blue squares) V light curves ..........................................................47
Figure 3.20 – Save BM3 File menu choice...............................................................47
Figure 3.21 – Save AE Phe parameter file as AEPheVspot.BM3 ............................48
Figure 3.22 – Save Zip File menu choice.................................................................49
Figure 3.23 – Save Zip file dialog for AE Phe..........................................................49
Figure 4.1 – Rotation parameters F1 and F2 for EE Peg.......................................... 51
Figure 4.2 – EE Peg with synchronous rotation (B filter).......................................52
Figure 4.3 – EE Peg with F1 = 5.0............................................................................53
Figure 4.4 – EE Peg at phase 0.98P .........................................................................54
Figure 4.5 – EE Peg at phase 0.02P .........................................................................54

vii
Figure 4.6 – Close-up of the Rossiter Effect in EE Peg for F1 = 5.0 .......................55
Figure 4.7 – RZ Sct double contact system with large Rossiter effect....................56
Figure 4.8 – Completed orbit of V1647 Sgr (B filter) ...............................................57
Figure 4.9 – Eccentric orbits of the components of V1647 Sgr at inclination = 0º .58
Figure 4.10 – Synthetic B light curve of V1647 Sgr (blue curve) if the system was a
0 degrees inclination .........................................................................................59
Figure 5.1 – The Data Table for IM Aur.................................................................. 61
Figure 5.2 – Save As… feature of the Data Table window......................................62
Figure 5.3 – Complete orbit displayed for the RS CVn system RT And (V filter)..63
Figure 5.4 – PostScript printing options dialog.......................................................63
Figure 5.5 – PostScript printing options dropdown menu......................................64
Figure 5.6 – PostScript Save dialog..........................................................................65
Figure 5.7 – PostScript File created information box..............................................65
Figure 5.8 – PostScript output of the Light and Radial Velocity curves and 3D
model of RT And (V-filter)................................................................................66
Figure 5.9 – 3D PostScript representation of RT And at phase 0.745P ..................67
Figure 5.10 – Large PostScript output of the V light curve of RT And...................67
Figure 5.11 – Large PostScript output of the Radial Velocity curve of RT And .....67
Figure 5.12 – PostScript representation of RT And at secondary eclipse (phase =
0.50P) .................................................................................................................68
Figure 5.13 – Light Curve Plot window enlarged with User Input dialog set for
light curve analysis ............................................................................................69
Figure 5.14 – Settings menu choice under the File menu of the User Input dialog
...........................................................................................................................69
Figure 5.15 – Settings dialog ....................................................................................70
Figure 5.16 – Settings naming input dialog .............................................................70
Figure 6.1 – AB And shown at phase 0.250P in spherical coordinate geometry; note
the irregular spacing of surface area points in the neck region .......................73
Figure 6.2 – AB And shown at phase 0.250P in cylindrical coordinate geometry;
note the better modeling of surface area points in the neck region compared
to the spherical coordinate model.....................................................................73
Figure 6.3 – Geometry menu in the User Input dialog ...........................................74
Figure 6.4 – Mode menu in the User Input dialog..................................................75
Figure 6.5 – The Spots menu necessary to Enable the Spots options ....................76
Figure 6.6 – Spot parameter input dialog ................................................................76
Figure 6.7 – Spot Longitude convention....................................................................77
Figure 6.8 – Add New Spot menu choice ................................................................78
Figure 7.1 – Calculate Radii choice under the Tools menu ....................................80
Figure 7.2 – Radii info page as a result of selecting the Calculate Radii tool ........80
Figure 7.3 – Save As menu choice that allows saving the Radii info page to a text
file ...................................................................................................................... 81
Figure 7.4 – Windows menu in the User Input dialog ............................................84
Figure 7.5 - Windows menu for controlling the display windows with LC
Residuals checked .............................................................................................85
Figure 7.6 - LC Residuals window displayed for CC Com: the number in the
bottom right hand corner is the sum of the squares of the residuals...............85
Figure 7.7 - Windows menu for controlling the display windows with RV
Residuals checked .............................................................................................86
Figure 7.8 - RV Residuals window displayed for CC Com: the number in the
bottom right hand corner is the sum of the squares of the residuals for the
more massive star, the number in the bottom left hand corner is the sum of
the squares of the residuals for the less massive star. ......................................87
Figure 7.9 - Surface Outlines choice under the Windows menu in the User Input
window...............................................................................................................88
Figure 7.10 - Surface Outline display for AB And....................................................89
Figure 7.11 - Refresh from current inputs menu selection under the File menu that
causes the Outlines window to be redrawn ......................................................89

viii
Figure 7.12 - Surface Outlines for the semi-detached binary TT Hydrae; the
smaller, more massive star is rotating asynchronously ....................................90
Figure 7.13 - Inner critical surfaces of V380 Cyg at periastron and apastron ......... 91
Figure 7.14 - V light curve of V380 Cyg showing the increase in flux around
periastron (phase 0.135P) .................................................................................. 91
Figure 7.15 - Surface Outlines Properties under the Edit menu in the Outlines
window...............................................................................................................92
Figure 7.16 - Surface Outlines Properties Display pane..........................................92
Figure 7.17 - Surface Outline display for AB And without the 3D stars and mass
centers................................................................................................................93
Figure 7.18 - Surface Outlines Properties Colors dialog..........................................94
Figure 7.19 - Surface Outline display for AB And with many colors changed........94
Figure 7.20 - PostScript Output under the File menu in the Surface Outlines
window...............................................................................................................95
Figure 7.21 - Surface Outlines PostScript printing options dialog..........................95
Figure 7.22 - Surface Outlines Save dialog for PostScript file creation...................96
Figure 7.23 - PostScript file creation a success!.......................................................96
Figure 7.24 - Multicolored PostScript output of AB And ........................................97
Figure 7.25 - Contents selection under the Help menu in the User Input window97
Figure 7.26 - Help window.......................................................................................98
Figure 7.27 - Tabs of the Help window named .......................................................99
Figure 7.28 - User Input window folder expanded one branch ............................ 100
Figure 7.29 - Index tabbed pane with omega potentials typed into the Find input
box ................................................................................................................... 101
Figure 7.30 - The result of pressing the Enter key after typing omega potentials
into the Find input box ................................................................................... 102
Figure 7.31 - Word Search pane initial view........................................................... 103
Figure 7.32 - Results of the Word Search for overcontact ..................................... 104
Figure 7.33 - Results of the Word Search for near contact .................................... 105
Figure 7.34 - Glossary tab showing the definition of the term systemic velocity . 106
Figure 7.35 - Favorites pane showing five selected Help pages added with the Add
to Favorites button .......................................................................................... 107
Figure 7.36 - Edit pop-up menu that shows up when right-clicking on a page in
the Favorites pane ........................................................................................... 108
Figure 8.1 – File menu in the Light Curve Plot window ....................................... 109
Figure 8.2 – The y bandpass light curve of TY Pyx automatically converted to flux
scale from magnitude scale..............................................................................111
Figure 8.3 – Graph Properties choice under the Edit menu ................................. 112
Figure 8.4 – Light Curve Graph Properties dialog showing the Scale tab (default
view)................................................................................................................. 113
Figure 8.5 – 44 i Boo plotted at factory default scale............................................. 114
Figure 8.6 – 44 i Boo initial Scale settings ............................................................. 114
Figure 8.7 – 44 i Boo with 0.80 as new Y-Axis Minimum...................................... 115
Figure 8.8 – Scale tab pane with 0.83 in Y-axis Minimum and 1.03 in Y-axis
Maximum ........................................................................................................ 116
Figure 8.9 – 44 i Boo rescaled light curve .............................................................. 116
Figure 8.10 – Scale pane with new values for Major and Minor Units of the Y-axis
......................................................................................................................... 117
Figure 8.11 – 44 i Boo Light Curve Plot with refined tick marks on Flux scale.... 117
Figure 8.12 – Tick Labels pane of Light Curve Graph Properties ........................ 118
Figure 8.13 – 44 i Boo Light Curve Plot with adjusted significant figures on the
Flux axis........................................................................................................... 119
Figure 8.14 – 44 i Boo Light Curve Plot with X-axis (Phase) Offset = 0.00 .......... 119
Figure 8.15 – X-axis (Phase) set for Major Units at 0.25 intervals and no minor tick
marks ............................................................................................................... 120
Figure 8.16 – TW Cas V light curve with 0.25 Major Units in Phase and no minor
tick marks ........................................................................................................ 120

ix
Figure 8.17 – Axis Title pane in Light Curve Graph Properties............................ 121
Figure 8.18 – TW Cas Light Curve Plot with changed Axis Titles ....................... 122
Figure 8.19 – Tick Labels tabbed pane of Light Curve Graph Properties window
......................................................................................................................... 122
Figure 8.20 – TW Cas V light curve shown with default tick labels ..................... 123
Figure 8.21 – Tick Labels parameters changed for the fun of it ........................... 124
Figure 8.22 – Tick Labels changed........................................................................ 124
Figure 8.23 – Tick Marks pane showing default values ........................................ 125
Figure 8.24 – Tick Marks pane with inward tick marks only................................ 126
Figure 8.25 – EM Car y Light Curve Plot demonstrating inward tick marks....... 126
Figure 8.26 – EM Car y Light Curve Plot showing the yellow Coordinate Tag
rectangle .......................................................................................................... 127
Figure 8.27 – Coordinate Tag pane of the Light Curve Graph Properties dialog 128
Figure 8.28 – Arbitrary changes to the format of the Coordinate Tag.................. 129
Figure 8.29 – New format of the Coordinate Tag (for poor eyesight?)................. 129
Figure 8.30 – Symbols pane of the Light Curve Plot Graph Properties dialog..... 130
Figure 8.31 – ER Vul with heavily spotted secondary star .................................... 131
Figure 8.32 – ER Vul V data with default symbols (size, color and shape).......... 131
Figure 8.33 – ER Vul V data and synthetic light curve with default symbols (size,
color and shape) .............................................................................................. 132
Figure 8.34 – ER Vul showing the observed light curve (red), spotted synthetic
curve (green), and unspotted synthetic curve (blue)...................................... 132
Figure 8.35 – Filename dropdown list showing the three sets of data on the Light
Curve Plot ........................................................................................................ 133
Figure 8.36 – Symbols pane with the file [Link] selected ...................... 134
Figure 8.37 – Choose color dialog with cyan chosen (clicked on cyan square at
left) ................................................................................................................... 134
Figure 8.38 – Symbols dropdown list with Hollow Square chosen (cyan)............ 135
Figure 8.39 – Enlarging the crosshair symbol for the observed data (read from file
[Link])............................................................................................ 136
Figure 8.40 – ER Vul V light curve plot (data = enlarged red crosshairs) with
spotted (cyan colored hollow squares) and unspotted (blue colored hollow
squares) synthetic light curves........................................................................ 136
Figure 8.41 – General tab in the LC Graph Properties window ............................ 137
Figure 8.42 – Default colors of the Light Curve Plot of 44 i Boo .......................... 138
Figure 8.43 – Color dialog with white selected for the Window Background ...... 138
Figure 8.44 – Window Background color changed from gray to white in the Light
Curve Plot of 44 i Boo...................................................................................... 139
Figure 8.45 – Border colors changed from black to red in the Light Curve Plot of
44 i Boo ............................................................................................................ 139
Figure 8.46 – Clear Plot Window choice under the Edit menu ................................ 140
Figure 8.47 – Clear plot data dialog ......................................................................... 140
Figure 8.48 – Radial Velocity Plot window for 44 i Boo ........................................ 141
Figure 8.49 – Radial velocity curves of 44 i Boo in default scale........................... 142
Figure 8.50 – Rescaling box drawn around radial velocity curves of 44 i Boo...... 142
Figure 8.51 – Rescaled plot of 44 i Boo radial velocity curves............................... 143
Figure 8.52 – Maximized radial velocity graph with data from 44 i Boo .............. 144
Figure 8.53 – Rescaling box drawn around the more massive star's radial velocity
data of 44 i Boo ................................................................................................ 144
Figure 8.54 – Appearance of the Radial Velocity Plot of 44 i Boo after releasing the
mouse button on the rescaling box drawn around the more massive stars'
radial velocity data........................................................................................... 145
Figure 8.55 – Radial Velocity Plot File menu choices........................................... 145
Figure 8.56 – Open dialog that appears after selecting the menu choice Open data
file .................................................................................................................... 147
Figure 8.57 – Open synthetic RV file choice under the File menu in the Radial
Velocity Plot window....................................................................................... 148

x
Figure 8.58 – Open dialog for reading in synthetic radial velocity curves............ 149
Figure 8.59 – Synthetic radial velocity curves plotted after the file was read in ... 149
Figure 8.60 – Export synthetic data choice under the File menu in the Radial
Velocity Plot window....................................................................................... 150
Figure 8.61 – Save dialog for exporting a synthetic radial velocity dataset........... 151
Figure 8.62 – PostScript Output choice under the File menu of the Radial Velocity
Plot window ..................................................................................................... 152
Figure 8.63 – PostScript printing options dropdown list in the Radial Velocity Plot
window............................................................................................................. 152
Figure 8.64 – Save dialog for a radial velocity PostScript file................................ 153
Figure 8.65 – PostScript file successfully created and saved!................................ 153
Figure 8.66 – PostScript output for AI Hya ........................................................... 154
Figure 8.67 – Other options within the PostScript printing options dropdown list
......................................................................................................................... 154
Figure 8.68 - Edit menu in the Radial Velocity Curve Plot window ..................... 155
Figure 8.69 - Radial Velocity Graph Properties dialog showing the Scale tab
(default view) ................................................................................................... 156
Figure 8.70 - V1143 Cyg plotted at factory default scale ........................................ 157
Figure 8.71 - V1143 Cyg initial Scale settings......................................................... 157
Figure 8.72 - V1143 Cyg with new maximum and minimum radial velocity values
......................................................................................................................... 158
Figure 8.73 - Scale pane with new values for Major and Minor Units of the Y-axis
......................................................................................................................... 159
Figure 8.74 - V1143 Cyg Radial Velocity Plot with refined tick marks on Radial
Velocity scale ................................................................................................... 159
Figure 8.75 - X-axis (Phase) set for Major Units at 0.25 intervals and no minor tick
marks ............................................................................................................... 160
Figure 8.76 - V1143 Cyg Radial Velocity Plot with 0.25 Major Units in Phase and
no minor tick marks ........................................................................................ 161
Figure 8.77 - Axis Title pane (default view) in Radial Velocity Graph Properties 161
Figure 8.78 - Radial Velocity Axis Title pane showing several changes from the
default values ................................................................................................... 162
Figure 8.79 - GG Ori Radial Velocity Plot with changed Axis Titles.................... 163
Figure 8.80 - Tick Labels tabbed pane of Radial Velocity Graph Properties
window............................................................................................................. 163
Figure 8.81 - RS Cha Radial Velocity curves shown with default tick labels........ 164
Figure 8.82 - Tick Labels parameters changed for the fun of it............................ 165
Figure 8.83 - Tick Labels changed ........................................................................ 165
Figure 8.84 - Tick Marks pane showing default values......................................... 166
Figure 8.85 - Tick Marks pane with inward tick marks only ................................ 167
Figure 8.86 - ZZ Boo Radial Velocity Plot demonstrating inward tick marks ..... 167
Figure 8.87 - ZZ Boo Radial Velocity Plot demonstrating inward and outward tick
marks ............................................................................................................... 168
Figure 8.88 - 44 i Boo Radial Velocity Plot showing the yellow Coordinate Tag
rectangle .......................................................................................................... 168
Figure 8.89 - Coordinate Tag pane of the Radial Velocity Graph Properties dialog
with default values........................................................................................... 169
Figure 8.90 - Arbitrary changes to the format of the Coordinate Tag................... 170
Figure 8.91 - New format of the Coordinate Tag .................................................. 170
Figure 8.92 - Symbols pane of the Radial Velocity Plot Graph Properties dialog 171
Figure 8.93 - ER Vul with heavily spotted secondary star..................................... 172
Figure 8.94 - ER Vul radial velocity data with default symbols (size, color and
shape)............................................................................................................... 172
Figure 8.95 - ER Vul radial velocity data and synthetic radial velocity curves with
default symbols (size, color and shape).......................................................... 173
Figure 8.96 - ER Vul radial velocity data and synthetic radial velocity curves with
default symbols (size, color and shape) maximized view .............................. 173

xi
Figure 8.97 - Filename dropdown list showing the sets of data on the Radial
Velocity Plot..................................................................................................... 174
Figure 8.98 - Symbols pane with the dataset Primary RV data selected............... 175
Figure 8.99 - Choose color dialog with cyan chosen (clicked on cyan square at left)
......................................................................................................................... 175
Figure 8.100 - Symbols dropdown list with Filled Square chosen (cyan) ............. 176
Figure 8.101 - Secondary RV Data set selected for Symbols editing..................... 176
Figure 8.102 - Light centers synthetic curves with changed symbols and colors . 177
Figure 8.103 - Enlarging the crosshair symbol for the observed data (read from file
[Link]).................................................................................................. 178
Figure 8.104 - ER Vul Radial Velocity Plot (data = enlarged blue crosshairs) with
synthetic radial velocity points........................................................................ 179
Figure 8.105 - General tab in the RV Graph Properties window ........................... 179
Figure 8.106 - Default colors of the Radial Velocity Plot of 44 i Boo .................... 180
Figure 8.107 - Color dialog with white selected for the Window Background ..... 181
Figure 8.108 - Window Background color changed from gray to white in the
Radial Velocity Plot of 44 i Boo ...................................................................... 181
Figure 8.109 - Reference Lines and Border colors changed from black to red in the
Radial Velocity Plot of 44 i Boo ...................................................................... 182
Figure 8.110 – Clear Plot Window choice under the Edit menu............................... 182
Figure 8.111 – Clear plot data dialog ........................................................................ 183
Figure 9.1 - Binary window showing BF Pav......................................................... 184
Figure 9.2 - File menu choice in the Binary window ............................................ 185
Figure 9.3 - PostScript output File menu choice in the Binary window............... 187
Figure 9.4 - Phase Control window that appears after pressing the Render button
in the User Input window ............................................................................... 187
Figure 9.5 – 3D Model of Binary only choice selected and ready for creating and
saving............................................................................................................... 188
Figure 9.6 - Save dialog for PostScript file............................................................. 188
Figure 9.7 - PostScript Printing Options dropdown menu ................................... 189
Figure 9.8 - Edit menu in the Binary window ....................................................... 189
Figure 9.9 - Binary Display Properties dialog ....................................................... 190
Figure 9.10 - Show sun circle checkbox selected................................................... 191
Figure 9.11 - AB And with Sun circle displayed (the red circle centered on the
barycenter)....................................................................................................... 191
Figure 9.12 - Sun circle error message ................................................................... 192
Figure 9.13 - Binary Color Tab dialog.................................................................... 192
Figure 9.14 - Choose color: Swatches Tab dialog.................................................. 193
Figure 9.15 - Choose color: Swatches Tab dialog with orange color selected ...... 194
Figure 9.16 - Binary Color Tab dialog with orange stars selected ........................ 195
Figure 9.17 - AB And shown at orbital phase 0.24 with the Sun circle (yellow)
showing the size of the Sun to the binary to scale.......................................... 195
Figure 9.18 - Choose color: HSB Tab dialog with orange color selected ............. 196
Figure 9.19 - Choose color: RGB Tab dialog with orange color selected ............. 197
Figure 10.1 – AB And displayed at phase 0.25P at 10 x 20 grid size ...................... 199
Figure 10.2 – AB And displayed at phase 0.25P at 20 x 40 grid size...................... 199
Figure 10.3 – AB And displayed at phase 0.25P at 40 x 80 grid size......................200
Figure 10.4 – AB And displayed at phase 0.25P at 80 x 160 grid size .................... 201
Figure 10.5 – AB And displayed at phase 0.25P at 120 x 240 grid size .................. 201
Figure 10.6 – Possible equipotentials for a binary system with mass ratio q = 0.40
.........................................................................................................................202
Figure 10.7 – Both stars have fillouts equal to -0.10 (detached system)....................203
Figure 10.8 – The smaller star has a fillout of 0.0, the larger star a fillout of -0.02 (a
typical near-contact system). ............................................................................204
Figure 10.9 – Fillout factor = 0.00 (definition of a contact system) ..........................204
Figure 10.10 – Fillout factor = 0.15 (typical overcontact system)..............................205
Figure 10.12 – Fillout factor = 0.80...........................................................................205

xii
Figure 10.13 – Definitions of radii; diagram seen from plane of binary orbit ...........206
Figure 10.14 – AI Cru viewed at different inclination angles .................................... 210
Figure 10.15 – MR Cyg shown at four phase orientiations ....................................... 210
Figure 10.16 – Observer pane in the User Input window ....................................... 211
Figure 10.17 – GZ CMa V light curve and synthetic curve with phase increment set
at 0.02 (50 points) ............................................................................................ 212
Figure 10.18 – GZ CMa V light curve and synthetic curve with phase increment set
at 0.01 (100 points) ........................................................................................... 212
Figure 10.19 – GZ CMa V light curve and synthetic curve with phase increment set
at 0.005 (200 points)......................................................................................... 213
Figure 10.20 – GZ CMa V light curve and synthetic curve with phase increment set
at 0.001 (1000 points)........................................................................................ 213
Figure 10.21 – Advanced Phase Intervals dialog with the default values in place. 214
Figure 10.22 – Advanced Phase Intervals dialog with the values changed to better
suit GZ CMa .................................................................................................... 214
Figure 10.23 – Observer dialog showing that the Advanced Phase Increments are
in effect ............................................................................................................ 215
Figure 10.24 – GZ CMa V light curves showing increased phase increments for the
out of eclipse portions ..................................................................................... 216
Figure 10.25 – Sample spots on RT And .................................................................. 218
Figure 10.26 – Binary Orbit showing the longitude of periastron ω; periastron is
labeled p...........................................................................................................220
Figure 10.27 – Ellipse with eccentricity = 0.60 ...................................................... 221
Figure 10.28 - Disk Mode tabbed pane in the User Input window.......................223
Figure 10.29 - Classical nova remnant V1494 Aql unfiltered light curve ...............223
Figure 10.30 - V1494 Aql model before enabling Disk Mode ................................224
Figure 10.31 - V1494 Aql model after enabling Disk Mode ...................................224
Figure 10.32 - V1494 Aql synthetic disk model (blue squares) plotted against the
unfiltered light curve (red crosshairs).............................................................225
Figure 10.33 - V1494 Aql disk model with hottest region indicated and about to be
eclipsed ............................................................................................................226
Figure 10.34 - Radial Velocity window for 44 i Boo...............................................226
Figure 10.35 - Mass Balance diagram for circular orbits: CM marks the barycenter
(center of mass) ...............................................................................................227
Figure 10.36 - Radial Velocity Plot for GZ CMa showing the mass centers
theoretical curves (red crosshairs); the blue crosshairs are the primary stars
radial velocity data points, the green crosshairs those of the secondary star 229
Figure 10.37 - GZ CMa radial velocity curves with light centers points added
(black squares for primary star, black crosshairs for secondary)...................230
Figure 10.38 - AB And showing the barycenter and the difference between mass
and light centers .............................................................................................. 231
Figure 10.39 - Observed and theoretical radial velocity curves of AB And ...........232
Figure 10.40 - AB And shown at the beginning and ending of secondary eclipse to
illustrate the cause of the Rossiter effect in the radial velocity curve of the
primary star......................................................................................................233
Figure 10.41 - Close up view of the radial velocity curves of AB And showing the
Rossiter Effect around secondary eclipse 0.50P .............................................234
Figure 10.42 - Normalized radial velocity curve for the overcontact system AE Phe
which had no observed radial velocity data as of 2004 ...................................235
Figure 10.43 - RV pane in the User Input window with parameters of EE Peg ...235
Figure 10.44 - Radial Velocity data of EE Peg showing the velocity
semiamplitudes K1 (more massive star) and K2 (less massive star) ...............236
Figure 10.45 - Radial Velocity data of EE Peg with systemic velocity indicated .237
Figure 11.1 – Inner and Outer Lagrangian surfaces for the detached binary KP Aql
.........................................................................................................................239
Figure 11.2 – Inner and Outer Lagrangian surfaces for the semi-detached binary
AD Her ............................................................................................................240

xiii
Figure 11.3 – Inner and Outer Lagrangian surfaces for the near contact binary
V1010 Oph........................................................................................................240
Figure 11.4 – Inner and Outer Lagrangian surfaces for the contact binary BX And
......................................................................................................................... 241
Figure 11.5 – Inner and Outer Lagrangian surfaces for the overcontact binary AE
Phe ...................................................................................................................242
Figure 11.6 – Inner Lagrangian surfaces for the overcontact binary RZ Sct ........242
Figure 11.7 – b (Strömgren blue) light curve of GZ CMa from Andersen et al.
(1985)................................................................................................................243
Figure 11.8 – Solid curve represents the solution given by Popper et al (1985) for
the b-light curve of GZ CMa ...........................................................................245
Figure 11.9 - Components of GZ CMa relative to each other and their inner and
outer critical Lagrangian surfaces. The plus sign between them is the
barycenter. .......................................................................................................245
Figure 11.10 – B light curve and solution (solid curve) of EE Peg from
Ebbighausen (1971) .........................................................................................246
Figure 11.11 – Components of EE Peg relative to each other and their inner and
outer critical Lagrangian surfaces. The plus sign between them is the
barycenter. .......................................................................................................247
Figure 11.12 – V light curve of NN Cep with synthetic model shown as solid curve
.........................................................................................................................247
Figure 11.13 – Critical Surfaces and model of NN Cep: both stars are relatively
close to their inner critical surfaces, resulting in non-spherical stars............248
Figure 11.14 – y light curve of AI Cru.....................................................................248
Figure 11.15 – Critical Lagrangian surfaces and model of AI Cru ........................249
Figure 11.16 – Light curve and synthetic model (solid curve) of AS Eri ...............250
Figure 11.17 – Critical Lagrangian surfaces and model of AS Eri .........................250
Figure 11.18 – V light curve of AK CMi.................................................................. 251
Figure 11.19 – Critical Lagrangian surfaces and model of AK CMi ...................... 251
Figure 11.20 – V light curve of BX And..................................................................252
Figure 11.21 – Critical Lagrangian surfaces and model of BX And ......................252
Figure 11.22 – V light curve of AD Cnc (Samec 1989) which has a fillout = 0.14.
The system at phase 0.25P is shown below the light curve............................253
Figure 11.23 – V light curve of AW Lac (Jiang 1983) which has a fillout = 0.60. The
system at phase 0.25P is shown below the light curve. ..................................254
Figure 11.24 – The effect of varying the value of fillout on the shape of an
overcontact binary light curve.........................................................................255
Figure 11.25 - The light curve of V1647 Sgr at four different longitudes of
periastron.........................................................................................................259
Figure 11.26 - Phase 0.160P of V1647 Sgr where the maximum surface areas of the
stars are displayed creating the bump near phase 0.160P. ............................. 261
Figure 11.27 – Synthetic light curve of V1647 (blue curve) for 0º orbital inclination;
.........................................................................................................................262
Figure 11.28 - Two spots on a single star in Binary Maker 3.................................264
Figure 11.29 - Light curve produced by the single star model above....................264
Figure 12.1 - WR20a, the most massive binary known as of 2004, with Sun drawn
to scale as the red circle ..................................................................................266
Figure A.1 - CALEB homepage graphic................................................................273
Figure A.2 - Newton-Raphson convergence error.................................................300
Figure A.2 - NonPhysical Parameter error ............................................................300
Figure A.3 - Limb darkening error......................................................................... 301

xiv
 Acknowledgements
A C K N O W L E D G E M E N T S

Acknowledgements

A
project of this magnitude involves countless hours and a myriad of
helpful people giving their valuable input. We wish to thank the many,
many workers in the close binary field who have and are using the
previous version of Binary Maker 2.0 and have offered many useful
suggestions for improving that program. We sincerely hope that they are
thrilled with the result: Binary Maker 3. Helpful discussions were had with
Robert E. Wilson, Slavek Rucinski, Edward F. Guinan, Paul Etzel, Eugene F.
Milone, Joseph Kallrath, Theo Pribulla, Dirk Terrell, Laurence DeWarf, Frank
Maloney, Emilio Lapasset, Cafer İbanoğlu, Edward Olson and Ronald Samec.
Many thanks go to Bill Morris at San Diego State University for final testing
the Solaris version of the program.

We have attempted to minimize errors and to maximize the ease of use of the
new program. Jonathan Hargis, Steve Sanders and Josh Lake were invaluable
in the creation and finalization of the program. DHB wishes to thank Eastern
University for access to superlative computer hardware and software that
greatly enhanced our ability to produce this work. He also wants to thank his
best friend and wife, Colleen, for putting up with and so strongly supporting
his years of work on this project; and their wonderful sons, Andrew and Jon,
who have always given great encouragement towards finishing the program.

DPS most wishes to thank his parents, Samuel and Patricia, for their love and
support. Also, Marjorie Wily for making it possible for him to come and
live/work at Eastern University during the summers, and the Raytheon
Solipsys Corporation for giving him a leave of absence to push the program
through to the final stages of completion. He also apologizes in advance and
takes responsibility for any bugs that still remain in the program.
It is our sincere hope that this program will be of great use to many people as
they analyze and learn about eclipsing binary systems. We also wish to thank
God for His wonderful creation and the orderliness of it, such that it can be so
beautifully described via mathematical representations.

David H. Bradstreet
David P. Steelman

xv
 Introduction
I N T R O D U C T I O N

Introduction to
Binary Maker 3
The history and philosophy behind Binary Maker 3 is briefly
discussed.

T
he original concept behind Binary Maker originated in the mid 1980’s as
a program to create three dimensional depictions of close binary stars to
better illustrate starspot positions for publications. In those days the
routines for outputting the stars were FORTRAN code with no user
interface (using one of the first IBM terminals rather than punch cards (!))
and the “high resolution” output was created on an electrostatic printer
called a Versatec. The program was submitted and the output might come
out later that day…if you were lucky and had friends in the computer
center. More likely was that the output would be flawed (either the printer
didn’t work or your coding/input parameters were wrong) and you’d have
to resubmit the job and try again. It sometimes took days to create the
figure that you needed!

Binary Maker 1.0 was the first attempt to banish those days from my
memory. I wrote that program on a Macintosh (the black and white tiny
screen version!) in Think C because I was informed that the college where
I worked was going to switch over to that brand of computer. That was
my first experience with object-oriented programming and dropdown
menus and using a mouse, and it wasn’t a pleasant one. I actually ended
up writing a fairly successful program to output graphics, but my eyeglass
prescription increased by 2 diopters as a result, for a program that would
only create three dimensional representations of close binaries in
PostScript (the Macintosh printer’s resident language) as well as what
would later become known as surface outlines.

I was soon writing a new version of Binary Maker 1.0 for PC’s (that was
the actual brand of computer my school eventually adopted!) in Turbo C,
and it was suggested to me by Larry Marschall of Gettysburg College that
introducing flux from the surface area elements wouldn’t be that difficult.
So I embarked on creating Binary Maker 2.0, a program that would
create light and radial velocity curves with a user-friendly interface (for
1993!). That program took three years to develop and is currently being
used all over the world for preliminary light curve analysis of circular orbit
binaries. Binary Maker 2.0 was written on a 386 MSDOS-based machine
with “prodigious” capabilities: 2 MB of RAM, a 40 MB hard drive, and a

1
I N T R O D U C T I O N

33 MHz microprocessor. At least it had a math coprocessor (which cost

an extra $600) that made the program run literally an order of magnitude
faster than without it! Imagine, that was the state of the art desktop
computer in 1991 and it retailed for $7000 (without the math chip)!

Almost immediately the users of the program wanted it to do more. The

program did not use a mouse (not many DOS-based programs did in
1993) and the dropdown menus were functional but clunky at best. But
the program was by far the easiest to use light curve synthesis program
available, and many hundreds of undergraduate and graduate students
learned the art and science of light curve analysis with version 2.0. It was
also used in many undergraduate non-science majors’ astronomy labs to
show students how astronomers analyze light curves and actually arrive at
parameters from light and radial velocity curves. But as with all software,
updated versions must come along or eventually it will cease to exist. And
with cheap, more powerful computers and ridiculous amounts of memory
and storage now available (relative to 10 years ago!) the time seemed right
to upgrade the program.

Java was the language of choice because (theoretically) it was designed as a

multiplatform language, and writing the program in Java has allowed
version 3 to “automatically” work on not only PC’s but also Mac’s, Linux
machines as well as Unix workstations. This was one of the major
complaints about Binary Maker 2.0; it only ran on PC’s. I know of at
least one astronomer who kept an old PC around just to run version 2.0!

Binary Maker 3 takes advantage of the many improvements in computer

technology over the past 11 years since version 2.0 was released.
Paramount to these improvements is execution speed. Version 2.0 used to
take several minutes to create a full orbit of a binary system, and that was
for circular orbit systems! An eccentric system, where both stars would
have to be recalculated at each phase point due to changing distances and
hence tidal forces reshaping the stars, would have taken a prohibitively
long time to create, and hence eccentric orbits were not attempted in
version 2.0. Binary Maker 3 can create asynchronously rotating stars as
well as eccentric orbits, and the program takes full advantage of the greatly
expanded graphics and memory of modern computers. As a quick
summary of new features compared to version 2.0, Binary Maker 3…

• is written in Java instead of C and hence can be run on machines

supporting Java (PC's, Mac's, Unix/Linux)

• uses windows instead of DOS and allows the use of a mouse

2
I N T R O D U C T I O N

• gives quick and easy access to the defining parameters of eclipsing

binary stars for efficient modeling

• allows eccentric orbits and asynchronous rotation of stars

• allows advanced phase increment options to calculate greater numbers

of phase points in critical regions of the light curves (such as in narrow
eclipse regions)

• no longer limits the number of starspots that can be placed on the

stars

• no longer limits the number of surface area elements that can be used
in modeling the stars

• no longer limits the number of points that can be calculated in phase

in the light and radial velocity curves

• no longer limits the number of data points that can be read into the
displays

• allows the reading in of phase/magnitude light curve data instead of

just phase/flux

• allows the user to set their own preferences regarding displays, graph
symbols, colors, output, etc.

• gives the user the ability to save various display configurations for easy
retrieval

• has a greatly expanded and easily accessible Help system

• has a Quick Mode to greatly speed up execution to quickly complete

light curves

• combines parameter files and data files into one Zip file for easy
loading of star sets

• calculates and plots residuals to the Light and Radial Velocity curves
for aid in fitting

• displays Outlines of the stars and their critical Roche surfaces if

applicable, including the ability to plot the surface area elements within
them

• updates Outlines of stars on the fly when rendering eccentric orbit

systems

3
I N T R O D U C T I O N

• greatly expands the options for creating PostScript high resolution

outputs

• comes with 200 different eclipsing binary parameters files containing

parameters and data from the literature

• gives the ability to use the many downloadable files existing in the
Catalog and Atlas of Eclipsing Binaries at [Link]
• gives access to the actual XY coordinates of the surface area elements
of the stars at any phase via text files for plotting in other programs
And there are a lot more improvements! If you liked version 2.0,
you're going to love version 3!

4
 Installation
I N S T A L L A T I O N

Installation
What you need to know in order to install Binary Maker 3
successfully on your computer.

T
his program was written in Java so that it would be compatible with several
different platforms, including Windows, Mac’s, Linux and Unix workstations.
The instructions necessary to install the program are given below, as well as
uninstall instructions. Most of the information given here is duplicated in the
[Link] file supplied on the Installation CD.

Hardware Requirements
With the extremely large number of numerical calculations taking place in
this program, the faster the computer the better. It should run on any
machine that supports Java, but some machines support Java better than
others. Binary Maker 3 runs well on Microsoft Windows machines,
Macintosh and Unix/Linux machines.

Binary Maker 3 is installed with its own copy of Sun's JVM (Java Virtual
Machine), meaning that it doesn't use the version of Java that may be
resident on your machine.

Binary Maker 3 has been tested on the following systems:

Windows 98SE
Windows XP
RedHat Linux 9
Macintosh OS X
Sun Solaris 8 (or later)
Known Hardware Requirements:
50-60 MB of hard drive space
The account used to install Binary Maker 3 must have
administrative/root permissions, although these permissions are not
required to run the program.

Binary Maker 3 Installation Instructions

Binary Maker 3 uses InstallShield to install the application on a
computer. The installation is very straightforward, but varies slightly
depending on what operating system it is being installed on. The current

5
I N S T A L L A T I O N

operating systems supported at Windows 98SE/2000/XP, RedHat Linux,

Sun Solaris on SPARC architectures, and Macintosh OS X.

License Key
Be certain that you copy your 25-digit license key (found on the CD case)
and put it in a safe place. You must have this license key in order to install
the program.

Windows 98SE Installation Instructions

1) Insert the Binary Maker 3 CD in the drive.

2) Double-click on the "My Computer" icon on the desktop, then double-

click on the CD drive containing the Binary Maker 3 CD.

3) Double-click on the file named "[Link]". This will start the

installation process.

4) After some initial processing, the "Welcome" screen will appear. Left-
click the "Next" button to continue.

5) The next screen displays the Binary Maker 3 program license. Please
read the information on this screen carefully. To continue installing the
program, left-click the "I accept the terms of the license agreement" radio
button, then left-click the "Next" button. If you do not wish to accept the
license, left-click the "Cancel" button, ending the installation of the
program.

6) Assuming you've accepted the license, the next screen displays the
directory the Binary Maker 3 program will be installed in. You may
accept the default, type in a new directory name, or select a directory by
left-clicking the "Browse" button. Left-click the "Next" button to
continue.

7) The next screen displays summary information about the install process,
including the directory that you selected in the previous step. If you wish
to change one of your selections, left-click the "Back" button, until you
reach the screen you wish to change. Left-clicking the "Cancel" button will
quit the installation, without any files having been installed. If you wish to
continue and install the program, left-click the "Install" button.

8) After left-clicking the "Next" button, the program files will be installed.

6
I N S T A L L A T I O N

Additionally, icons will be installed on the Windows Desktop, and in the

"Programs" menu under the "Start" button, under the group "Binary
Maker".

9) Once the installation has been completed, a post-installation summary

screen will be displayed. Left-click the "Finish" button to complete the
installation.

10) The first time Binary Maker 3 is run, either by double-clicking the
"BM3" icon on the system desktop, or by selecting "BM3" from the
"Binary Maker" program group under the "Start Menu", a license key
dialog will be displayed. Type in the 25-digit license key on your CD case.
If the typed license key is valid, Binary Maker 3 will start. You will only
be asked for the license key the first time you run the program.

Windows 2000/XP Installation

Instructions
You must install Binary Maker 3, and run it for the first time, from either
the "Administrator" account, or a user account with "Administrator"
privileges. If you attempt to install the program from a non-Administrator
account, the installation will fail.

1) Insert the Binary Maker 3 CD in the drive.

2) Double-click on the "My Computer" icon on the desktop, then double-

click on the CD drive containing the Binary Maker 3 CD.

3) Double-click on the file named "[Link]". This will start the

installation process.

4) After some initial processing, the "Welcome" screen will appear. Left-
click the "Next" button to continue.

5) The next screen displays the Binary Maker 3 program license. Please
read the information on this screen carefully. To continue installing the
program, left-click the "I accept the terms of the license agreement" radio
button, then left-click the "Next" button. If you do not wish to accept the
license, left-click the "Cancel" button, ending the installation of the
program.

6) Assuming you've accepted the license, the next screen displays the
directory the Binary Maker 3 program will be installed in. You may

7
I N S T A L L A T I O N

accept the default, type in a new directory name, or select a directory by

left-clicking the "Browse" button. Left-click the "Next" button to
continue.

7) The next screen displays summary information about the install process,
including the directory that you selected in the previous step. If you wish
to change one of your selections, left-click the "Back" button, until you
reach the screen you wish to change. Left-clicking the "Cancel" button will
quit the installation, without any files having been installed. If you wish to
continue and install the program, left-click the "Install" button.

8) After left-clicking the "Next" button, the program files will be installed.
Additionally, icons will be installed on the Windows Desktop, and in the
"Programs" menu under the "Start" button, under the group "Binary
Maker".

9) Once the installation has been completed, a post-installation summary

screen will be displayed. Left-click the "Finish" button to complete the
installation.

10) You must run Binary Maker 3 for the first time from either the
"Administrator" account, or an account with "Administrator" privileges.
The first time Binary Maker 3 is run, either by double-clicking the "BM3"
icon on the system desktop, or by selecting "BM3" from the "Binary
Maker" program group under the "Start Menu", a license key dialog will be
displayed. Type in the 25-digit license key on your CD case. If the typed
license key is valid, Binary Maker 3 will start. You will only be asked for
the license key the first time you run the program. Once the license key
has been successfully entered, any user account can be used to run the
program.

RedHat Linux Installation Instructions

You must install Binary Maker 3 from either the "root" account, or as
"superuser". If you attempt to install the program from a non-root or non-
superuser account, the installation will fail.

1) Insert the Binary Maker 3 CD in the drive.

2) Mount the CD. Switch to the mounted CD directory, and run the
executable "[Link]": ./[Link]

3) After some initial processing, the "Welcome" screen will appear. Left-
click the "Next" button to continue.

8
I N S T A L L A T I O N

4) The next screen displays the Binary Maker 3 program license. Please
read the information on this screen carefully. To continue installing the
program, left-click the "I accept the terms of the license agreement" radio
button, then left-click the "Next" button. If you do not wish to accept the
license, left-click the "Cancel" button, ending the installation of the
program.

5) Assuming you've accepted the license, the next screen displays the
directory the Binary Maker 3 program will be installed in. You may
accept the default, type in a new directory name, or select a directory by
left-clicking the "Browse" button. Left-click the "Next" button to
continue.

6) The next screen displays summary information about the install process,
including the directory that you selected in the previous step. If you wish
to change one of your selections, left-click the "Back" button, until you
reach the screen you wish to change. Left-clicking the "Cancel" button will
quit the installation, without any files having been installed. If you wish to
continue and install the program, left-click the "Install" button.

7) After left-clicking the "Next" button, the program files will be installed.

8) Once the installation has been completed, a post-installation summary

screen will be displayed. Left-click the "Finish" button to complete the
installation.

9) You must run Binary Maker 3 for the first time from either the "root"
account, or as "superuser". To run Binary Maker 3, switch to the program
installation directory (default is "/opt/BinaryMaker/") and run the
"[Link]" shell script. (Do NOT run the "[Link]" executable directly,
as the proper working directory for the program will not be set up. Use
the "[Link]" shell script). The first time Binary Maker 3 is run, a license
key dialog will be displayed. Type in the 25-digit license key on your CD
case. If the typed license key is valid, Binary Maker 3 will start. You will
only be asked for the license key the first time you run the program. Once
the license key has been successfully entered, any user account can be used
to run the program, by running the "[Link]" script.

Also in the program installation directory is a PDF file containing the

Binary Maker 3 Manual (BM3_Manual.pdf) and a sample lab, in
Microsoft Word format (Sample_BM3_Lab.doc). The bm3_icon.xpm file
can be used as an icon for an application shortcut, if you wish to create
one.

9
I N S T A L L A T I O N

Solaris SPARC Installation Instructions

You must install Binary Maker 3 from either the "root" account, or as
"superuser". If you attempt to install the program from a non-root or non-
superuser account, the installation will fail.

1) Insert the Binary Maker 3 CD in the drive.

2) Mount the CD. Switch to the mounted CD directory, and run the
executable "[Link]": ./[Link]

3) After some initial processing, the "Welcome" screen will appear. Left-
click the "Next" button to continue.

4) The next screen displays the Binary Maker 3 program license. Please
read the information on this screen carefully. To continue installing the
program, left-click the "I accept the terms of the license agreement" radio
button, then left-click the "Next" button. If you do not wish to accept the
license, left-click the "Cancel" button, ending the installation of the
program.

5) Assuming you've accepted the license, the next screen displays the
directory the Binary Maker 3 program will be installed in. You may
accept the default, type in a new directory name, or select a directory by
left-clicking the "Browse" button. Left-click the "Next" button to
continue.

6) The next screen displays summary information about the install process,
including the directory that you selected in the previous step. If you wish
to change one of your selections, left-click the "Back" button, until you
reach the screen you wish to change. Left-clicking the "Cancel" button will
quit the installation, without any files having been installed. If you wish to
continue and install the program, left-click the "Install" button.

7) After left-clicking the "Next" button, the program files will be installed.

8) Once the installation has been completed, a post-installation summary

screen will be displayed. Left-click the "Finish" button to complete the
installation.

9) You must run Binary Maker 3 for the first time from either the "root"
account, or as "superuser". To run Binary Maker 3, switch to the
program installation directory (default is "/opt/BinaryMaker/") and run
the "[Link]" executable. The first time Binary Maker 3 is run, a license

10
I N S T A L L A T I O N

key dialog will be displayed. Type in the 25-digit license key on your CD
case. If the typed license key is valid, Binary Maker 3 will start. You will
only be asked for the license key the first time you run the program. Once
the license key has been successfully entered, any user account can be used
to run the program, by running the "[Link]" executable.

Also in the program installation directory is a PDF file containing the

Binary Maker 3 Manual (BM3_Manual.pdf) and a sample lab, in
Microsoft Word format (Sample_BM3_Lab.doc).

Macintosh OS X Installation
Instructions
You must install Binary Maker 3 from either the "root" account. If you
attempt to install the program from a non-root account, the installation
will fail. In Mac OS X the root user is disabled by default. Information
about enabling the root account on Mac OS X can be found at:

[Link]

1) Insert the Binary Maker 3 CD in the drive.

2) Once the CD has been inserted a "CD icon" will appear on the desktop.
Double-click the CD icon, opening a window displaying the contents of
the CD. Double-click the file "[Link]" to start the
installation.

3) After some initial processing, the "Welcome" screen will appear. Left-
click the "Next" button to continue.

4) The next screen displays the Binary Maker 3 program license. Please
read the information on this screen carefully. To continue installing the
program, left-click the "I accept the terms of the license agreement" radio
button, then left-click the "Next" button. If you do not wish to accept the
license, left-click the "Cancel" button, ending the installation of the
program.

5) Assuming you've accepted the license, the next screen displays the
directory the Binary Maker 3 program will be installed in. You may
accept the default, type in a new directory name, or select a directory by
left-clicking the "Browse" button. Left-click the "Next" button to
continue.

11
I N S T A L L A T I O N

6) The next screen displays summary information about the install process,
including the directory that you selected in the previous step. If you wish
to change one of your selections, left-click the "Back" button, until you
reach the screen you wish to change. Left-clicking the "Cancel" button will
quit the installation, without any files having been installed. If you wish to
continue and install the program, left-click the "Install" button.

7) After left-clicking the "Next" button, the program files will be installed.

8) Once the installation has been completed, a post-installation summary

screen will be displayed. Left-click the "Finish" button to complete the
installation.

9) You must run Binary Maker 3 for the first time from the "root"
account. To run Binary Maker 3, go to the folder where BM3 was
installed (default is the "Binary Maker" folder under "Applications").
Double-click the "[Link]" file to start Binary Maker 3.

The first time Binary Maker 3 is run, a license key dialog will be
displayed. Type in the 25-digit license key on your CD case. If the typed
license key is valid, Binary Maker 3 will start. You will only be asked for
the license key the first time you run the program. Once the license key
has been successfully entered, any user account can be used to run the
program.

Also in the program installation directory is a PDF file containing the

Binary Maker 3 Manual (BM3_Manual.pdf) and a sample lab, in
Microsoft Word format (Sample_BM3_Lab.doc).

Uninstall Instructions
----------------------
Binary Maker 3 comes with an uninstallation program, which will remove
the program components from a computer. As with the installation,
running the uninstallation is very straightforward, but varies slightly
according to the operating system.

Windows 98SE Uninstall Instructions

1) From the "Start" menu, go to "Settings" and left-click on "Control
Panel".

2) In the "Control Panel" windows, double-click on the "Add/Remove

Programs" icon.

12
I N S T A L L A T I O N

3) Double-click on the "Binary Maker" entry in the "Install/Uninstall" list.

4) The Binary Maker uninstallation program will start. After some initial
processing, a "Welcome" screen will appear. Left-click the "Next" button
to continue.

5) A screen will appear asking which features to uninstall. The only option
is "Everything" which should be checked. Left-click the "Next" button to
continue.

6) A "Pre-Uninstall Summary" screen will appear. Left-click the

“Uninstall" button to begin the uninstall.

7) The uninstall process will proceed. Once it is finished, a "Post-Uninstall

Summary" screen will appear, indicating the uninstall was successful. Left-
click the "Finish" button to exit the program.

8) The uninstall process only removes files that it specifically installed in

the installation process. Because of this, the program directory where
Binary Maker 3 was installed, as well as any user-created data or
configuration files, will not be deleted when the program is uninstalled.
The program directory can be deleted, if desired.

Windows 2000/XP Uninstall

Instructions
--------------------------------------

You must uninstall Binary Maker 3 from either the "Administrator"

account, or a user account with "Administrator" privileges. If you attempt
to uninstall the program from a non-Administrator account, the
uninstallation will fail.

1) From the "Start" menu, go to "Settings" and left-click on "Control

Panel".

2) In the "Control Panel" windows, double-click on the "Add/Remove

Programs" icon.

3) Double-click on the "Binary Maker" entry in the "Install/Uninstall" list.

4) The Binary Maker uninstallation program will start. After some initial
processing, a "Welcome" screen will appear.

13
I N S T A L L A T I O N

5) A screen will appear asking which features to uninstall. The only option
is "Everything" which should be checked. Left-click the "Next" button to
continue.

6) A "Pre-Uninstall Summary" screen will appear. Left-click the

"Uninstall" button to begin the uninstall.

7) The uninstall process will proceed. Once it is finished, a "Post-Uninstall

Summary" screen will appear, indicating the uninstall was successful. Left-
click the "Finish" button to exit the program.

8) The uninstall process only removes files that it specifically installed in

the installation process. Because of this, the program directory where
Binary Maker 3 was installed, as well as any user-created data or
configuration files, will not be deleted when the program is uninstalled.
The program directory can be deleted, if desired.

RedHat Linux Uninstall Instructions

You must uninstall Binary Maker 3 from either the "root" account, or as
"superuser". If you attempt to uninstall the program from a non-root or
non-superuser account, the uninstallation will fail.

1) In the program install directory (default is /opt/BinaryMaker/) switch

to the "_uninst" subdirectory.

2) In the _uninst directory, run the [Link] executable:

./[Link]

3) The Binary Maker uninstallation program will start. After some initial
processing, a "Welcome" screen will appear. Left-click the "Next" button
to continue.

4) A screen will appear asking which features to uninstall. The only option
is "Everything" which should be checked. Left-click the "Next" button to
continue.

5) A "Pre-Uninstall Summary" screen will appear. Left-click the

"Uninstall" button to being the uninstall.

6) The uninstall process will proceed. Once it is finished, a "Post-Uninstall

Summary" screen will appear, indicating the uninstall was successful. Left-
click the "Finish" button to continue to the final screen.

14
I N S T A L L A T I O N

7) A screen will appear reminding you to logout and log back in. Left-click
"Finish" to exit the program.

8) The uninstall process only removes files that it specifically installed in

the installation process. Because of this, the program directory where
Binary Maker 3 was installed, as well as any user-created data or
configuration files, will not be deleted when the program is uninstalled.
The program directory can be deleted, if desired.

Solaris SPARC Uninstall Instructions

You must uninstall Binary Maker 3 from either the "root" account, or as
"superuser". If you attempt to uninstall the program from a non-root or
non-superuser account, the uninstallation will fail.

1) In the program install directory (default is /opt/BinaryMaker/) switch

to the "_uninst" subdirectory.

2) In the _uninst directory, run the [Link] executable:

./[Link]

3) The Binary Maker uninstallation program will start. After some initial
processing, a "Welcome" screen will appear. Left-click the "Next" button
to continue.

4) A screen will appear asking which features to uninstall. The only option
is "Everything" which should be checked. Left-click the "Next" button to
continue.

5) A "Pre-Uninstall Summary" screen will appear. Left-click the

"Uninstall" button to being the uninstall.

6) The uninstall process will proceed. Once it is finished, a "Post-Uninstall

Summary" screen will appear, indicating the uninstall was successful. Left-
click the "Finish" button to continue to the final screen.

7) A screen will appear reminding you to logout and log back in. Left-click
"Finish" to exit the program.

8) The uninstall process only removes files that it specifically installed in

the installation process. Because of this, the program directory where
Binary Maker 3 was installed, as well as any user-created data or

15
I N S T A L L A T I O N

configuration files, will not be deleted when the program is uninstalled.

The program directory can be deleted, if desired.

Macintosh OS X Uninstall Instructions

You must uninstall Binary Maker 3 from either the "root" account. If
you attempt to uninstall the program from a non-root account, the
installation will fail. Information about setting up the root account on
Mac OS X can be found at:

[Link]

1) Double-click on the "Binary Maker" folder under "Applications".

2) In the "_uninst" folder, double-click on the file named

"[Link]".

3) The Binary Maker uninstallation program will start. After some initial
processing, a "Welcome" screen will appear. Left-click the "Next" button
to continue.

4) A screen will appear asking which features to uninstall. The only option
is "Everything" which should be checked. Left-click the "Next" button to
continue.

5) A "Pre-Uninstall Summary" screen will appear. Left-click the

"Uninstall" button to being the uninstall.

6) The uninstall process will proceed. Once it is finished, a "Post-Uninstall

Summary" screen will appear, indicating the uninstall was successful. Left-
click the "Finish" button to continue to the final screen.

7) A screen will appear reminding you to logout and log back in. Left-click
"Finish" to exit the program.

8) The uninstall process only removes files that it specifically installed in

the installation process. Because of this, the program directory where
Binary Maker 3 was installed, as well as any user-created data or
configuration files, will not be deleted when the program is uninstalled.
The program directory can be deleted, if desired.

16
 1
Chapter
C H A P T E R 1 - B R I E F O V E R V I E W

Brief Overview of
Binary Maker 3
Binary Maker 3 is briefly presented and general terms and
window functions are defined.

B
inary Maker 3 has four primary display windows which are briefly described in
this chapter. They are covered in much greater detail in their own chapters later
on in this User Manual. Some general window names and functions are
shown below in Figure 1.1:

Figure 1.1 – User Input window with features named

Referring to Figure 1.1, the title bar displays the name of the window and
also the name of any file that has been read into it. The window can be
moved to any position on the screen by placing the mouse cursor over the
title bar, holding down the left mouse button, and then moving the

17
C H A P T E R 1 - B R I E F O V E R V I E W

window by moving the mouse. Simply release the mouse button to place
the window. The three buttons on the right side of the title bar minimize
the window (hide it while sending a small label the bottom of the screen
taskbar), maximize the window (make it take up the entire screen), and
close the window. In the case of the User Input window, the close
button ends the program. In the other main windows (Binary, Light
Curve Plot and Radial Velocity Plot) the close button only hides the
windows and does not exit the program. The pulldown menus (File,
Geometry, etc.) give access to a multitude of user options for input and
output and setting various preferences for the program. The input boxes
allow the user to type in input parameters. The tabbed panes, when
clicked on with the mouse, reveal new dialogs that allow access to even
more input or display options. The Render button initiates the
rotation/revolution of the binary after input parameters have been
entered, either manually or by reading in parameter files.
Below are the four main windows of Binary Maker 3: the User Input,
Binary, Light Curve Plot and Radial Velocity Plot windows.

Figure 1.2 – The four main display windows of Binary Maker 3

18
C H A P T E R 1 - B R I E F O V E R V I E W

Figure 1.3 – User Input window

The User Input window shown in Figure 1.3 is the central user interface for
entering and editing parameters, as well as creating (rendering) the synthetic
light and radial velocity curves. Its many menus and tabbed dialogs give the
user easy access to the vast majority of the features of Binary Maker 3. The
menus are described in detail in the Help sections under User Input window
and the tabbed dialogs and their corresponding parameters are fully described
later in this manual as well as in the Help files of the program itself.

Figure 1.4 – Binary display window

19
C H A P T E R 1 - B R I E F O V E R V I E W

The Binary window displays the three-dimensional representation of the

stars as they rotate and revolve. The phase (orbital aspect of the system as
seen from Earth) is shown at the bottom right hand corner of the
window. This window can be maximized (Maximize button in the upper
right part of the title bar, the center button of the three) and the stars can
be resized by pressing the F1 (zoom in), F2 (zoom out) and F3 (resume
default scale) function keys. The outermost crosshairs ("+") represent the
mass centers of the stars; the center crosshair is the barycenter (center of
mass) of the two stars. The barycenter is also the center of the screen and
does not move. The dotted curves (breadcrumbs) represent the orbital
paths of the mass centers of the two stars as they revolve about the
barycenter. Many of the window's characteristics can be changed via the
Edit menu (e.g., colors, symbol choices, what is and isn't displayed, etc.).

Figure 1.5 – Light Curve Plot display window

The Light Curve Plot window shows the observed data points as red
crosshairs ("+") in flux scale (linear scale as opposed to magnitude which
is logarithmic) and the synthetically generated light curve points are blue
squares. Many light curves can be read in and plotted simultaneously and
all symbols and colors can be chosen by the user via the Edit menu. The
scales, major and minor tick marks, labeling and many other features of
the graphs can also be changed by the user through the Edit menu. The
window can be resized by dragging an edge using the mouse or maximized
using the Maximize button (middle button of the three in the upper right
hand corner). The File menu give the user access to reading in data files,
saving synthetic light curves, creating PostScript output and closing the
graph which hides it from view.

20
C H A P T E R 1 - B R I E F O V E R V I E W

Figure 1.6 – Radial Velocity Plot display window

The Radial Velocity Plot window shows the observed data points as blue
crosshairs ("+") in kilometers per sec. The red crosshairs are the
synthetically generated radial velocity curves of the stars if they are
considered as point masses concentrated at their centers. The black
squares are the synthetically generated radial velocity curves of the more
massive star taking into account the velocity of its surface including
rotation. The black points are the synthetically generated radial velocity
curves of the less massive star taking into account the velocity of its
surface including rotation. Note the bulges of the black curves relative to
the red ones near phases 0.0 and 0.5, known as the Rossiter effect. This
rotational effect is explained in detail in Chapters 4 and 10. All the
symbols and colors can be selected by the user via the Edit menu. The
scales, major and minor tick marks, labeling and many other features of
the graphs can also be changed by the user by selecting the Edit menu.
The window can also be resized by dragging an edge using the mouse or
maximized using the Maximize button (middle button of the three in the
upper right hand corner). The File menu give the user access to reading
in data files, saving synthetic light curves, creating PostScript output and
closing the graph which hides it from view.

21
 2
Chapter
C H A P T E R 2 - G E T T I N G S T A R T E D

Getting Started
Some of the major features of the program are discussed in order
to quickly get Binary Maker 3 up and running.

L et’s begin by opening an already existing data file for the eclipsing binary χ2
Hydrae. Begin the program and select the first choice (Open Binary
Parameter File) under the File menu in the User Input window. There are
several types of files that can be opened via this menu selection:

Figure 2.1 - User Input Dialog window with File menu opened

Binary Maker 3 (BM3) system parameter files, Binary Maker 2.0 (bmd)
parameter files, as well as Zip files containing BM3, light curve (nrm) and
radial velocity (rv) files. We will first open a Zip file so that you can see many
of the features of all of the major windows. Clicking on the menu choice

22
C H A P T E R 2 - G E T T I N G S T A R T E D

Open Binary Parameter File and you will see the following standard Open
dialog box:

Figure 2.2 – File Open dialog window

Double-click on the Zip folder and you will see the following list of folders
within the Zip folder:

23
C H A P T E R 2 - G E T T I N G S T A R T E D

Figure 2.3 – Constellation folders within the Zip folder

There are several hundred binary star zip files sorted by constellation within
the Zip folder. The folders are designated with the official IAU three-letter
abbreviation. (All of the binaries contained within these folders are listed in
the Appendix.) Since we are looking for a particular binary in the constellation
of Hydra, double-click on the folder entitled Hya, which will reveal the
following display:

24
C H A P T E R 2 - G E T T I N G S T A R T E D

Figure 2.4 – Eclipsing Binary folder showing the zip files for the systems in
Hydra

Open the Zip file entitled Chi2Hya_Clausen&[Link] by

either double-clicking on the file or clicking once and then clicking on the
Open button. The screen will now look like the following:

25
C H A P T E R 2 - G E T T I N G S T A R T E D

Figure 2.5 – The four display windows after reading in the file [Link]

Three files have been automatically read into the program that had been
compressed into the single Zip file. The filenames of the files read in are
displayed in the title bars at the top of each window: Chi2Hyay.BM3 in the
User Input dialog window, [Link] in the Light Curve window, and
[Link] in the Radial Velocity window. The light curve displayed is the
y-band (Strömgren filter) data of Clausen & Nordström (1978a, 1978b) and
the radial velocity data is from Andersen (1975).

We are now ready to calculate the model that has been read in, but before we
do that, let’s expand the scales of the two plots to make the data easier to see.
Move the cursor over the Light Curve window and left mouse click anywhere
within that window to select it as the focus (the window whose title bar is
highlighted has the focus). There are several ways to change the scale of the
plots, and we will discuss just two of them right now. By pressing the user
function key F1 you can expand the scale (zoom in) while keeping the top of
the light curve mostly stationary. The F2 function key reduces the scale (zoom
out) and the F3 function key resumes the default scale. (This method is a
throwback to Binary Maker 2.0.) You can play with these until you make the
light curve fit the window however you want.

Another even more flexible and dynamic means of expanding the graph scale
is to place the cursor over a part of the graph and, holding the left mouse key

26
C H A P T E R 2 - G E T T I N G S T A R T E D

down, drag a rectangle over that part of the graph that you wish to expand, as
shown below in Figure 2.4:

Figure 2.6 – Resizing box dragged around the light curve data in order to
rescale the plot

When you release the left mouse button, the Light Curve Plot rescales as
shown below:

Figure 2.7 - The resulting rescaling of the χ2 Hya y light curve after releasing
the mouse button

27
C H A P T E R 2 - G E T T I N G S T A R T E D

You can rescale any part of the graph that you wish using this method. This is
an excellent way to zoom in on just a small portion of an eclipse or any part of
the light curve in which you have special interest. For example, when the
rescaling box was drawn around the following part of the above light curve, as
shown below:

Figure 2.8 – Rescaling box drawn around primary eclipse

Releasing the left mouse button resulted in the following display:

Figure 2.9 – Zoomed in portion of primary eclipse

28
C H A P T E R 2 - G E T T I N G S T A R T E D

Anytime that you wish to unzoom a display, you can simply press the F3 key
and the plot will return back to the original default scaling.

That was so much fun let’s rescale the Radial Velocity plot. Place the cursor
over that window and left mouse click anywhere within it to select it as the
focus, and then press the F1 key. The F1 key enlarges the scale, F2 reduces the
scale, and F3 resumes the original default scale, just as in the Light Curve
window. Also, we can drag a rescaling box with the cursor around any part of
the radial velocity graph to resize it, again just like the Light Curve window.
Use either method you wish, but usually the F1 key is the easiest if the systemic
velocity (shown by the position of the horizontal dashed line) of the binary is
close to zero; otherwise the rescaling box is best. The rescaled Radial
Velocity plot should look something like this:

Figure 2.10 – Rescaled radial velocity plot of χ2 Hydrae

We are now ready to run the model. Move the cursor to the User Input
window and press the Render button. The binary stars will now be created,
and several things will begin happening all at once. A small dialog box will
appear over the Render button that looks like this:

Figure 2.11 – Phase Control dialog

29
C H A P T E R 2 - G E T T I N G S T A R T E D

This is the Phase Control dialog and it allows the user to Stop (pause) the
rendering of the light curve, to single-step through the light curve (single “>”
button) or resume the automatic rendering of the orbit (“>>” button).

Most noticeable will be the three dimensional plot of the stars themselves
orbiting each other as the system progresses in phase. At each phase point
(specified by the Phase Increment input – more on this later) a flux will be
calculated and plotted (blue squares) on the light curve plot. Also, two radial
velocity points will be generated and plotted on the Radial Velocity Plot for
each star. When the system has completed one orbit, the four-screens should
look something like the following:

Figure 2.12 – Orbit completely rendered for χ2 Hydrae

You can now perform a myriad of other tasks. We will look at a few of these
now, and then later at each window’s many features in much more detail in its
own chapter.

As in any standard windows-style program, the three small boxes in the upper
right hand corner of each window perform (from right to left) the Minimize,
Maximize, and Close functions. Clicking on the Close button in the User
Input window will exit the program. However, clicking on any of the other
three Close buttons (Binary, Light Curve Plot or Radial Velocity Plot
windows) will only hide the screens from view, not exit the program.

30
C H A P T E R 2 - G E T T I N G S T A R T E D

Minimizing a window sends its miniature title bar to the bottom of the screen.
Maximizing a window will completely fill the screen with that window, which
can be extremely useful in more carefully scrutinizing your theoretical curve
compared to the observed one. Maximize the Light Curve Plot window of
χ2 Hydrae and you will see a large window similar to the one below:

Figure 2.13 – Maximized y light curve plot of χ2 Hydrae

Remember that you can also rescale any part of this graph with the rescaling
rectangle created by dragging the mouse and simultaneously holding down the
left mouse button. To return to the four-screen view simply press the Restore
button (middle one of the three in the upper right hand corner). Press the
Restore button now and return to the four-screen view.

You can maximize any of the four-screens in this way. You can of course also
move any of the four windows to any position on the screen by placing the
cursor anywhere on the title bar and holding down the left mouse button and
dragging the window to wherever you wish to place it. Windows can also be
resized like all standard windows by placing the cursor near an edge or corner
and, while holding down the left mouse button, dragging the window into the
desired size.

31
C H A P T E R 2 - G E T T I N G S T A R T E D

We have now run through some of the major functions of Binary Maker 3.
Next we will look in more detail at each window and the many features that are
available in each one.

32
 3
Chapter
C H A P T E R 3 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G W I N D O W

User Input Dialog Window

Some of the details of the User Input dialog window are
discussed and illustrated for the circular orbit overcontact binary
AE Phoenicis.

A
ssuming that you have completed Chapter 2, we will now begin to delve into
the details and features of the User Input Dialog Window. Binary Maker
3 can open three different types of data files using the first choice under the
File menu in the User Input window, Open Binary Parameter File:

Figure 3.1 - User Input dialog window with File menu opened

1. Binary Maker 3 parameter files (BM3 extension)

2. Binary Maker 2.0 parameter files (bmd extension)

3. Zip files (combined data files – Zip extension)

33
C H A P T E R 3 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G W I N D O W

Binary Maker 3 parameter files (BM3) consist of tagged data files (see the
Appendix for a detailed example of what a BM3 file looks like) that specify
all of the necessary parameters for constructing a binary model and
displaying it according to the user’s specifications. Binary Maker 2.0
parameter files (bmd) were used in the former version of this program, and
the ability to read these older files was preserved as a courtesy to those many
users who may have files in that format. However, note that Binary Maker
3 cannot output bmd files, it can only read them, so the user should read in
any bmd files that they have and save them as BM3 files for later use in
Binary Maker 3.

The ability to read Zip files in Binary Maker 3 greatly enhances its ability to
quickly display an already existing star’s parameters, light and radial velocity
curves, tremendously improving the program’s efficiency over version 2.0 for
demonstration purposes during lectures. Zip files can be created via Binary
Maker 3 or with other software such as WinZip (more on this later). A Zip
file consists of a BM3 file and either a light curve data file (nrm) and/or a
radial velocity data file (rv). The light curve and radial velocity data files will
be discussed in more detail when their respective windows are examined in
the following chapters. Sample nrm and rv files are given in the Appendices.

We have used the Open Binary Parameter File menu choice in Chapter 2,
so we will now explore entering binary parameters manually into the User
Input dialog and then practice with the other functions of the User Input
window, like Save BM3 File.

First we need a parameter set to enter manually, and the parameter set that
follows is for the overcontact binary system AE Phoenicis. The light curve is
from Grønbech (1976) and the parameters are from the paper by Maceroni et
al. (1994).

Begin Binary Maker 3, and we’ll start by entering the grid sizes. Click on the
Grid tab if the Grid input pane isn’t already visible as in Figure 3.2. The
latitude grid number is the number of surface area elements to be
calculated from the pole of the star to its equator. We will enter 20 for this
value. The longitude grid number is the number of surface area elements
to be calculated along the major (largest) axis of the star along its equator.
To make the number of longitude elements comparable to the latitude
elements, you should make this number twice as large as the latitude grid
number, in this case 40 as shown below. Note that you can advance to the
next input field (even on the next dialog pane) by pressing the Tab key.

34
C H A P T E R 3 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G W I N D O W

Figure 3.2 – Latitude and Longitude grid numbers input dialog

20 x 40 is a good choice initially for circular orbit systems because it results in

accurate light curves while not overtaxing computing time. For final models
you can boost these values to 80 by 160 or some other value which will
produce even more accurate representations (and awesome 3D graphics!) but
will drastically increase computing time. For eccentric orbit systems (which
require considerably more computing time – more on this later), grid sizes of
10 x 20 are appropriate as beginning values.

Next click on the Omegas tab, and you will see the following in the User
Input dialog:

35
C H A P T E R 3 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G W I N D O W

Figure 3.3 – Omega potentials input dialog

This dialog defaults to expecting Omega potential values (Roche

equipotentials, explained in Chapter 10). However, for this example, we will
be exploiting one of the other four methods of defining the sizes and shapes
of the stars, the Fillout factor. This value is often used to express the size of
contact and overcontact binaries because fillout values (along with the mass
ratio) succinctly express the percentage of how far beyond the inner critical
Lagrangian surface the stars’ surface lie. To access the Fillout mode, use the
mouse and click on the menu choice Mode and then select the choice
Fillout as shown below:

36
C H A P T E R 3 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G W I N D O W

Figure 3.4 – Selecting Fillout mode

You will immediately be returned to the User Input dialog and will now see
that instead of being asked for a mass ratio and two Omega potentials, you
are now asked for a mass ratio and two fillouts. Enter 2.5006 for the
mass ratio and 0.175 for both Fillout factors, as shown below:

Figure 3.5 – Mass Ratio and Fillout values entered for AE Phe

Next click on the Temperature tab and we will enter the effective
wavelength of the filter used for the observations (5500 Å = V filter in the

37
C H A P T E R 3 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G W I N D O W

Johnson system) and the temperatures of the two stars: T1 = 6000 ºK and T2
= 6145 ºK. Note that the default value for effective wavelength is already
the value for the V-filter, so you don’t need to enter it here.

Figure 3.6 – Effective Wavelength and Temperatures for AE Phe

Next click on the Limb Darkening tab where we will first enter the gravity
brightening (historically called gravity darkening) values (g) and the limb
darkening coefficients (x). The values for AE Phe are g1 = g2 = 0.32 and
x1 = x2 = 0.558. Enter them as shown below:

38
C H A P T E R 3 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G W I N D O W

Figure 3.7 – Gravity brightening and limb darkening values for AE Phe

Next click the Reflection tab, and we will enter 0.5 for both reflection
coefficients (albedo), again as shown below. Third light (any extraneous
light that may be diluting the light curve and hence diminishing the eclipse
depths) is equal to zero for AE Phe, so leave that entry at its default value of
0.0.

Figure 3.8 – Reflection coefficients and Third light for AE Phe

39
C H A P T E R 3 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G W I N D O W

Finally, click on the Observer tab. You might wonder what the “observer”
has to do with a binary system’s parameters, and the answer is that the
observer’s position determines the inclination of the system, hence the name.
Enter 87.99 for the inclination, and leave the Normalization Phase (0.25)
and Normalization Factor (1.00) values at their default settings. Change
the Phase Increment to 0.005. This value determines how often to
calculate the aspect of the binary in its orbit, i.e., calculate the system’s flux
every 0.005 steps in phase, where the phase goes from 0.0 to 1.0.

Figure 3.9 – Observer input pane: Inclination for AE Phe and phase
settings

We are finally ready to run the model! To create the theoretical (or synthetic)
V light curve of AE Phe, press the Render button at the bottom of the
User Input dialog and sit back and watch the glory! You will see the three
dimensional stars orbiting in the Binary window, while the light curve is
plotted in the Light Curve window and simultaneously the radial velocity
curve is plotted (both mass centers and light centers curves) in the Radial
Velocity pane. When the orbit is completed, the four-screen display should
look something like the following:

40
C H A P T E R 3 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G W I N D O W

Figure 3.10 – AE Phe model after the orbit is completed by pressing the
Render button

Granted this is a beautiful light curve, but does it match reality? Let’s find
out by loading in the V-filter light curve of Grønbech (1976) and comparing
it to the theoretical light curve. [Normally one would have loaded this data
set in first, but for this example we were concentrating on entering values
manually into the User Input dialog.]

To read in a light curve data file (these files must have nrm for a filename
extension), click on the File menu choice in the Light Curve Plot window
and select the Open data file menu choice. Find the file called
[Link] and open it. The light curve will be read and automatically
plotted in the Light Curve Plot window. The four-screen display should
now look like the following:

41
C H A P T E R 3 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G W I N D O W

Figure 3.11 – AE Phe V data (red crosshairs) and synthetic light curve (blue
squares) both plotted in Light Curve Plot window

As can be seen, the model is excellent for most of the curve, but seems to
miss a portion of the highest part of the light curve centered on phase 0.75.
Maceroni et al. (1994) accounted for this discrepancy by placing two cooler
starspots on the larger star. We will now enter the parameters for these
spots.

Click on the Spots menu choice near the top of the User Input window.
Select the Enable Spots menu choice to turn on the spots capability as
shown below:

42
C H A P T E R 3 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G W I N D O W

Figure 3.12 – Enable Spots menu choice

Immediately after you enable Spots mode by clicking on Enable Spots, the
following Spots Input dialog will appear:

Figure 3.13 – Spots Input dialog

The program is awaiting the input of the spot parameters for spot #1, and it
defaults to a single spot. AE Phe was modeled with two spots, and we’ll add
a second one after we enter the parameters for the first one. The spots were
placed on star 1 (the larger star), and this is the default setting of the radio

43
C H A P T E R 3 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G W I N D O W

buttons next to the label Star Number, so this is ready to go. Enter 90.0
for the Colatitude, 242.62 for the Longitude, 12.11 for the Spot
Radius, and 0.90 for the Temperature Factor, as shown below:

Figure 3.14 – Values for spot #1 for AE Phe

Next we need to enter another spot, so we must tell the program to create
spot #2. Click on the Spots menu at the top of the User Input window,
and select the Add New Spot choice.

Figure 3.15 – Add New Spot menu choice

44
C H A P T E R 3 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G W I N D O W

This will create a second spot input dialog, which you should now fill in with
the parameters for spot #2: enter 90.0 for the Colatitude, 296.92 for
the Longitude, 12.11 for the Spot Radius, and 0.90 for the
Temperature Factor, as shown below:

Figure 3.16 – Spot #2 input values for AE Phe

Now let’s create the new synthetic light curve and see how well it fits the
data. Click on the Render button and marvel. The output should look like
the following after the orbit is completed:

45
C H A P T E R 3 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G W I N D O W

Figure 3.17 – AE Phe synthetic light curve with spots

The fit now is absolutely gorgeous! Remember that you can more closely
inspect the light curve by maximizing its window as well as dragging a
rescaling box around any part of it that you wish to zoom in on. You can
also press the F1 key (if that window has the focus) to enlarge the scale. You
might also have noticed as the stars were orbiting that the two spots were
drawn on the larger star in red. A PostScript illustration of AE Phe at phase
0.75P with grid sizes of 40 x 80 is shown in Figure 3.18 below:

Figure 3.18 – AE Phe as seen at phase 0.75P with two cool starspots

By maximizing and rescaling the light curve you can create a figure like the
following:

46
C H A P T E R 3 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G W I N D O W

Figure 3.19 – Maximized and rescaled AE Phe observed (red crosshairs) and
theoretical (blue squares) V light curves

Before we finish up with this example, let’s save the binary parameter file
(called a BM3 file). Click on the File menu on the User Input window, and
select the menu choice Save BM3 File.

Figure 3.20 – Save BM3 File menu choice

47
C H A P T E R 3 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G W I N D O W

You will see a standard file save dialog box opened, and you should select an
appropriate place to save the parameter file, as well as choosing an
appropriately descriptive filename, such as AEPheVspot.BM3 as shown
below:

Figure 3.21 – Save AE Phe parameter file as AEPheVspot.BM3

After you save this file, you can read it in later using the Open Binary
Parameter File menu choice.

In addition, since we have also read in the V data file, we can create a Zip
file that would combine both the parameter file (BM3 file) and the data file
(nrm file) into a single compressed Zip file. The benefit of this is that we
can later read in both files simultaneously by just reading in the Zip file. (In
fact, if there was a radial velocity data file also read in, that file would also be
placed into the Zip file.)

To create a Zip file, select the Save Zip File menu choice under the File
menu of the User Input dialog as shown below:

48
C H A P T E R 3 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G W I N D O W

Figure 3.22 – Save Zip File menu choice

The name of the Zip file can be whatever you wish, but the file extension
(the last three characters after the decimal point at the end of the filename)
must be zip. For example, you could save the file as shown below:

Figure 3.23 – Save Zip file dialog for AE Phe

49
 4
Chapter
C H A P T E R 4 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - M O R E P A R A M E T E R S

User Input Dialog Window

– More Binary Parameters
Further details of the User Input dialog window tabbed panes
are discussed and illustrated for a circular orbit binary EE Pegasi
and one that exhibits asynchronous rotation (RZ Sct). Finally an
eccentric orbit system (V1647 Sgr) is explored.

A
ssuming that you have completed Chapter 3, we will now delve into more
details and features of the User Input dialog window. Binary Maker 3 can
create binary systems whose stars do not rotate synchronously with their
revolution. Asynchronous rotation is entered through the tabbed pane called
Rotation. Let’s read in a binary that rotates synchronously and see the effects that
rapid rotation has upon the stars and their light and radial velocity curves when we
increase the rotation rate.

Begin the program and open the file EEPeg_Lacy1984B.Zip in the Peg (Pegasus)
folder within the Zip folder by using the Open Binary Parameter File under the File
menu in the User Input window. Click on the Rotation tab to see the values for this
particular star and you will see that both rotation parameters F1 and F2 are equal to 1.0
as shown below:

50
C H A P T E R 4 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - M O R E P A R A M E T E R S

Figure 4.1 – Rotation parameters F1 and F2 for EE Peg

These rotation parameters represent the ratio of the angular rotation rates of the stars
compared to their angular revolution rates. A value of 1.0 means synchronous rotation
for circular orbits. This is the usual condition for circular orbit binaries because of tidal
friction forces that cause the binaries to arrive at synchronous rotation because that is a
minimum energy configuration (as is the circular orbit situation itself compared to
elliptical orbits). Note that the checkbox to toggle Enable pseudo-synchronization
beneath the input boxes for F1 and F2 is checked. This default sets circular orbit
binaries to have synchronous rotation. (The term pseudo-synchronous will be explained
later in this chapter when we deal with an eccentric orbit binary.) Calculate the
theoretical light and radial velocity curves for the system by pressing the Render
button to see what the stars look like and to verify that indeed the model fits the light
and radial velocity curves well. Your screen should look like the following (the scales
of the light and radial velocity curves were optimized using the function key F1).

51
C H A P T E R 4 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - M O R E P A R A M E T E R S

Figure 4.2 – EE Peg with synchronous rotation (B filter)

Within the Rotation pane of the User Input dialog, click on the Enable Pseudo-
synchronization checkbox to uncheck it which will allow us to change the values of
F1 and F2. Change the value of F1 from 1.0 to 5.0. This will make the larger star rotate
five times for every one revolution. Now Render the system and notice the
differences in the shape of star 1 as well as the differences in the light and radial
velocity curves. Your screen should appear as below:

52
C H A P T E R 4 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - M O R E P A R A M E T E R S

Figure 4.3 – EE Peg with F1 = 5.0

There are several obvious differences noticeable. Beginning with the Binary window,
the larger star has swelled its equatorial radius considerably because of its significantly
increased rotational speed. Its equatorial radius (a or rback) went from 0.1727 to 0.2001,
a 16% increase in radius. The light curve has changed its shape considerably, especially
around primary eclipse. This is due to the fact that the star is now much larger than
before and much less of it is eclipsed by its smaller and cooler companion. Notice also
that the total secondary eclipse is wider, again because the primary star is larger and
therefore began blocking the smaller star sooner than before and it stayed totally
eclipsed longer for the same reason.

The radial velocity curve did not change as much except for a strange set of “bumps”
on either side of primary eclipse. This bump is the so-called Rossiter effect, and occurs
because of the way the smaller secondary star is progressively covering up the rapidly
rotating primary star. Consider the following diagrams of the orientations of the stars
at primary and secondary eclipse:

53
C H A P T E R 4 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - M O R E P A R A M E T E R S

Figure 4.4 – EE Peg at phase 0.98P

Figure 4.5 – EE Peg at phase 0.02P

Consider Figure 4.4, where the secondary star is beginning to block the primary star
around phase 0.98P. In that figure, the secondary star is moving to the right and is
blocking the left side of the primary. The portion of the primary star that is mostly
covered is rotating “towards” the observer creating “blue-shifted” radial velocities for
each surface area element, and the still visible side on the right is rotating away from
the observer, contributing “red-shifted” radial velocities for those surface area
elements. When the primary star is not blocked, these diametrically opposite radial
velocities due to the star’s rotation broaden the spectral lines on both sides. But,
during the beginning of the eclipse, the secondary star preferentially blocks out the
approaching (“blue-shifted”) surface area elements, leaving the unblocked receding
limb (“red-shifted”) surface area elements. This produces a preponderance of red-
shifted light and therefore the large jump in red-shift seen in the radial velocity curve
(see Figure 4.6 below). The reverse occurs (see Figure 4.5) as the secondary star
traverses the right limb of the primary causing a preponderance of blue-shifted surface
area elements and hence an increase in the blue-shift seen after primary eclipse (again
see Figure 4.6).

54
C H A P T E R 4 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - M O R E P A R A M E T E R S

Figure 4.6 – Close-up of the Rossiter Effect in EE Peg for F1 = 5.0

Let us now look at what happens when a star is rotating so fast that its surface reaches
its inner Lagrangian surface. We will consider the system RZ Scutum, where the
primary star spins so fast that it has reached its inner Lagrangian surface, and the
secondary star has evolved to reach its inner Lagrangian surface. Such a system is
known as a double contact binary.

Open the file RZSct_Wilson1985V.Zip in the Sct folder (Scutum) (located in the Zip
folder) by using the Open Binary Parameter File under the File menu in the User
Input window. Click on the Rotation tab to see the values for this particular star,
noting that the primary star’s F1 value (6.66) is quite large! Render the system and
marvel at the large Rossiter effect in the radial velocity curve. Note the curious football
shape of the more massive component. Your final four-screen view will appear as
shown below in Figure 4.7 (after appropriate plot rescaling):

55
C H A P T E R 4 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - M O R E P A R A M E T E R S

Figure 4.7 – RZ Sct double contact system with large Rossiter effect

Finally, we will look at an eccentric binary system, V1647 Sgr. Eccentric binary
systems are typically far more complex than circular orbit systems because of the
varying distances between the stars (and hence the changing gravitational influences
and varying equipotential surfaces that define the sizes and shapes of both stars) and
the changing aspect of the orbit itself due to apsidal motion. The details of eccentric
orbit systems are discussed at length in Chapter 10.

Open the file V1647Sgr_Clausen1977b.Zip in the Sgr folder (Sagittarius) (located in

the Zip folder) by using the Open Binary Parameter File in the User Input window.
You will see that the light curve is very different than any of the ones you have seen in
this manual thus far, in that the phase of secondary eclipse is not at 0.50P as it must be
for circular orbit systems. The position of secondary eclipse for an eccentric orbit
system depends on the eccentricity and the longitude of periastron, i.e., the orientation
of the major axis of the binary relative to the observer’s line of sight (see Chapter 10
for details). Also, because the orbital velocity of the stars now varies intrinsically and
not just due to the projected line of sight to the observer, the radial velocity curves
have a very noticeable non-sinusoidal shape to them. Render the system and watch
how the distance between the stars varies, as well as their relative velocities. You will
notice that the generation of the light and radial velocity curves of eccentric systems
takes considerably more time than for circular orbit binaries. This occurs because the
surfaces of the stars must be re-calculated at every phase point due to the changing
distance between the stars. The volumes of the stars are kept constant, but the

56
C H A P T E R 4 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - M O R E P A R A M E T E R S

potentials of the stars will indeed change dependent upon their distances, and so
several models are calculated for each phase step until one is found that keeps both
volumes constant. Hence the longer calculation times, since for circular orbits the stars
maintain constant equipotentials throughout their orbits and so their surfaces only
need to be calculated once per orbit. The completed curves of V1647 Sgr are shown
below:

Figure 4.8 – Completed orbit of V1647 Sgr (b filter)

Another interesting feature to the light curve occurs centered around phase 0.16P.
There is a small but real (see the data) “bump” in the flux, and this occurs because the
stars are actually slightly elongated at this phase because they are near periastron and
are tidally extended and hence slight brighter at this phase. The highest part of the
“bump” does not occur exactly at periastron (when the stars would be maximally
extended along their major axes) because at phase 0.16P the stars exhibit their
maximum cross sectional area to the observer on Earth (see Figure 4.9 below). To
better see this, the orbital diagram below was constructed by setting the Inclination of
V1647 Sgr to 0º and then rendered:

57
C H A P T E R 4 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - M O R E P A R A M E T E R S

Figure 4.9 – Eccentric orbits of the components of V1647 Sgr at inclination = 0º:
V1647 Sgr components are shown at phase 0.160P where the maximum cross-
sectional area of the tidally elongated stars is displayed to observers on Earth

The fact that periastron occurs at phase 0.183P is confirmed by the fact that the radial
velocity curves are a maximum around this phase (see the radial velocity curves in
Figure 4.8) since, as we know from Kepler’s Laws, bodies are traveling fastest when
they are closest together in their orbits.

As further proof of the larger sizes of the stars at periastron due to maximum tidal
stresses at that point, note that even at an inclination of 0º there is still a small “bump”
in the flux at phase 0.183P (phase of periastron) as seen in the Light Curve Plot
window when the system is rendered (see figure below). This again reveals the slight
increase in size of the stars as they near periastron phase.

58
C H A P T E R 4 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - M O R E P A R A M E T E R S

Figure 4.10 – Synthetic B light curve of V1647 Sgr (blue curve) if the system was a 0
degrees inclination; note that the “bump” in flux now occurs at phase = 0.183P
(periastron), confirming that the stars are maximally extended (and hence brightest) at
that point in their orbits

The term synchronous rotation has little meaning in an eccentric orbit since the stars are
orbiting at ever-changing speeds as they orbit each other. There is an equilibrium
configuration for eccentric orbit systems regarding rotation and revolution, and when
the stars are in this configuration they are said to exhibit pseudo-synchronization (Hut
1981). This occurs when the angular velocity of rotation of the stars equals the angular
velocity of revolution of the stars at periastron (nearest approach of the stars to each
other). See Chapter 10 for more details concerning this and other parameters of
eccentric orbit binaries.

59
 5
Chapter
C H A P T E R 5 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - F I L E M E N U O P T I O N S

User Input Dialog Window

– File Menu Options
The rest of the File menu options are discussed in detail: Data
Table, PostScript Output and Settings.

A
s is evident from working through the program thus far, the User Input
dialog is the heart of the user interface and the engine for making the
program perform the tasks that you need it to accomplish. In this chapter on
this window we will delve into the remainder of the File menu options.

Data Table
The next feature under the File menu of the User Input window to be discussed is
the Data Table option. This selection displays a window containing the input
parameters as well as the numerical output from the calculations of the light and radial
velocity curves, etc. As an example of this useful feature, read in the file
IMAur_Gulmen1985V.Zip (located in the Aur folder within the Zip folder), and
Render the system’s complete orbit. After the orbit is complete, select the Data
Table option under the File menu and you will see the output table displayed as
shown below:

60
C H A P T E R 5 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - F I L E M E N U O P T I O N S

Figure 5.1 – The Data Table for IM Aur

The Data Table window can be scrolled like any window, as well as maximized or
minimized. It includes all of the theoretical points calculated for all of the light and
radial velocity curves as well as the absolute parameters of the stars if radial velocity
measurements have been included. The Data Table can also be saved as a text file by
selecting the Save As… option under its File menu, as shown below:

61
C H A P T E R 5 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - F I L E M E N U O P T I O N S

Figure 5.2 – Save As… feature of the Data Table window

Thus all of the information in the Data Table can be saved and used later for
whatever purposes might arise.

PostScript Output
The next selection under the File menu is the PostScript Output choice. There are
quite a few options under this choice that allow you to save your displays as PostScript
files for printing high quality graphics and/or further editing for publication using
programs like Adobe PhotoShop.

To discuss the various options under this menu choice, let’s load a new star into the
program and see many of the options that we have to print out the displays generated
by Binary Maker 3. Read in the file RTAnd_Kjurkchieva2001V.Zip (in the And
folder within the Zip folder), a binary with a distorted light curve due to the presence
of large, cool starspots, known as an RS CVn system. Utilize the user function keys F1
and/or F2 or the rescaling box dragged by the mouse discussed in chapter 2 to rescale
the graphs so that they fill the displays. Render the system’s complete orbit, and your
four-screen display should as appear something like that shown below:

62
C H A P T E R 5 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - F I L E M E N U O P T I O N S

Figure 5.3 – Complete orbit displayed for the RS CVn system RT And (V filter)

We will now create several different PostScript outputs of these displays. Under the
File menu of the User Input window select the PostScript Output option. You will
then see the following dialog box displayed:

Figure 5.4 – PostScript printing options dialog

The default choice for PostScript output in the User Input dialog is the combination
Light and Radial Velocity Curves and the 3D binary model. In addition, the option to
print the figures in color or not can be checked or unchecked by clicking on the Print
in color checkbox. The ability to print in black and white only will typically be most
useful for publication figures. Place the mouse cursor over the bottom-pointing arrow

63
C H A P T E R 5 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - F I L E M E N U O P T I O N S

and left mouse button click to initiate the drop-down menu of the PostScript
printing options dialog, and you will see the following:

Figure 5.5 – PostScript printing options dropdown menu

The choices are mostly self-explanatory; let’s use some of them. (We haven’t discussed
the residuals option of Binary Maker 3 – that will be discussed in Chapter 7.) Using
the mouse cursor, select the first choice, “Light and Radial Velocity Curves, and 3D Model
of Binary.” This will create a PostScript version of these three windows as displayed on
the computer monitor, including whatever scaling changes you have made. When you
select this option, click on the OK button and a standard Save dialog will prompt you
for a filename. (You can also save the file to any folder that you wish by changing it
within the Save dialog.) In this example we will save the file as [Link] to
reflect the fact that is contains all of the output plots and is a PostScript file. The Save
dialog box should appear similar to the following:

64
C H A P T E R 5 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - F I L E M E N U O P T I O N S

Figure 5.6 – PostScript Save dialog

When you click on the Save button within the Save dialog, you will see a small dialog
box (shown below) that confirms that the Postscript file was successfully created and
saved.

Figure 5.7 – PostScript File created information box

You can now edit this file using appropriate graphics software, or print it on a printer
that supports PostScript. The printed output of this plot will appear as shown below:

65
C H A P T E R 5 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - F I L E M E N U O P T I O N S

Figure 5.8 – PostScript output of the Light and Radial Velocity curves and 3D model
of RT And (V-filter)

Similarly we can also output single, enlarged versions of each of the three above
displays by selecting “3D Model of Binary only,” “Large Light Curve only,” or “Large
Radial Velocity Curve only,” as shown below:

Figure 5.9 – 3D PostScript representation of RT And at phase 0.745P

66
C H A P T E R 5 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - F I L E M E N U O P T I O N S

Figure 5.10 – Large PostScript output of the V light curve of RT And

Figure 5.11 – Large PostScript output of the Radial Velocity curve of RT And

If you wish to output different aspects of the stars themselves, i.e., what do the stars
look like at different phases, you can manipulate the display by single-stepping through

67
C H A P T E R 5 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - F I L E M E N U O P T I O N S

the orbit using the Phase Control box described in Chapter 2 until the Binary
window contains the view that you wish to print. The representation below shows
phase 0.50P such that both spots on the primary star are visible, as they would appear
at the middle of secondary eclipse:

Figure 5.12 – PostScript representation of RT And at secondary eclipse (phase =

0.50P)

Settings
The last option on the File menu of the User Input dialog is the Settings choice.
This option gives the user the ability to save most of the settings that have been
changed from the “factory default” settings that the program exhibits “out of the box.”
The myriad of changes than can be made to the display windows will be discussed in
detail in the chapters describing the respective windows, but we will look at an
orientation of the windows that we might wish to save that will facilitate light curve
analysis.

One Suggestion for a Useful Layout

Let’s set up Binary Maker 3 so that the only windows visible are the two that are
needed for light curve analysis, namely the User Input and Light Curve Plot
windows. Close the Binary window and the Radial Velocity Plot window by clicking
on the red “X” button on the upper right hand corner of their windows (i.e., their
respective Close buttons). Next place the mouse cursor over the bottom right hand
corner of the Light Curve Plot window and, while simultaneously holding down the
left mouse button, drag the corner of the window over to the bottom right hand
corner of the computer screen. Your display should look something like the following:

68
C H A P T E R 5 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - F I L E M E N U O P T I O N S

Figure 5.13 – Light Curve Plot window enlarged with User Input dialog set for light
curve analysis

This set up configuration can be saved by selecting the Settings menu choice under
the File menu of the User Input window, as shown below:

Figure 5.14 – Settings menu choice under the File menu of the User Input dialog

69
C H A P T E R 5 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - F I L E M E N U O P T I O N S

Figure 5.15 – Settings dialog

Note the two available settings are the <Default> and the <Factory Default>. These
settings files cannot be deleted, hence the brackets < >. The <Default> settings file
contains the settings that will set up the program when it is first begun. The <Factory
Default> settings file contains the original default settings of the program “out of the
box.” When Binary Maker 3 is first run, the <Default> settings file is identical to the
<Factory Default> settings file.

To save the current settings as a new settings file, click on the Add current settings
as… button. You will be presented with an input dialog that will ask for a descriptive
name for your current setting, as shown below:

Figure 5.16 – Settings naming input dialog

After a name for the settings is entered and the OK button clicked, the new settings
will be placed in the Settings dialog. The next time the program is opened, this

70
C H A P T E R 5 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - F I L E M E N U O P T I O N S

settings file can be selected from the Settings dialog by clicking on its name and
pressing the OK button. The settings of the file will be immediately implemented.

If you desire to make a particular set up the <Default> setting, i.e., the settings file is
automatically loaded whenever you start the program, you can save the settings as the
<Default> file by having the file settings in place and then clicking on the Use current
settings as default button.

Another Suggestion

Another useful setting might be to make each of the four major display windows
exactly cover one quarter of your monitor. This maximizes the visibility of each
window and customizes the sizes of the four displays to your particular computer and
screen resolution. This is relatively easily accomplished by manually resizing each
window, placing one of its corners in the appropriate corner of the monitor, and then
dragging its diagonally opposite corner to the center of the screen.

Resetting the <Default> to <Factory Default> settings

If you change the <Default> settings and later want to reset the <Default> to the
original <Factory Default> settings, simply load the <Factory Default> settings by
clicking on it and pressing the OK button. Then choose the Settings dialog again and
press the Use current settings as default button and the <Default> will be reset to
the <Factory Default> once again.

71
 6
Chapter
C H A P T E R 6 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - M O R E M E N U S

User Input Dialog Window

– Geometry, Mode and
Spots Menu Options
The Geometry, Mode and Spots menu options of the
User Input window are discussed in detail.

I
n this chapter we will delve into the Geometry, Mode and Spots menu options
of the User Input window.

Geometry Menu
The Geometry menu allows the user to select the kind of geometry (spherical or
cylindrical) that will be used to construct the surface area elements of the stars. The
default geometry, spherical, is far and away the most common geometry used for
almost every type of star. Cylindrical coordinates are usually used only for overcontact
binaries where the complicated surface near the interconnecting neck region is difficult
to model with spherical coordinates.

For example, let’s construct a typical overcontact binary, AB And, using first spherical
and then cylindrical coordinates. The model for AB And in spherical coordinates
looks is shown below in Figure 6.1:

72
C H A P T E R 6 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – M O R E M E N U S

Figure 6.1 – AB And shown at phase 0.250P in spherical coordinate geometry; note
the irregular spacing of surface area points in the neck region

The model for AB And in cylindrical coordinates is shown below in Figure 6.2:

Figure 6.2 – AB And shown at phase 0.250P in cylindrical coordinate geometry; note
the better modeling of surface area points in the neck region compared to the spherical
coordinate model

To set the geometry, select the Geometry menu and click on either spherical or
cylindrical as shown below:

73
C H A P T E R 6 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – M O R E M E N U S

Figure 6.3 – Geometry menu in the User Input dialog

Note that because cylindrical coordinates are advantageous only for overcontact
binaries, cylindrical coordinates mode in Binary Maker 3 cannot create stars that have
eccentric orbits or asynchronous rotation.

Mode Menu
Binary Maker 3 has four different input modes, each controlled by the selections
under the Mode menu in the User Input dialog. As shown below, the four input
modes are Omega potentials, C potentials, Radii input, and fillout input.

74
C H A P T E R 6 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – M O R E M E N U S

Figure 6.4 – Mode menu in the User Input dialog

The meanings of the different inputs are discussed in detail in Chapter 10 where all of
the parameters needed to specify a binary system are explained. The Omega
potential is the parameter used in the Wilson-Devinney light curve synthesis program
to specify the stars’ surfaces (along with the mass ratio). The C potential is essentially
just a redefinition of the Omega potential. The Radius input mode allows the user
to specify the sizes of the stars by entering the fractional radii of the stars which
corresponds to the a radius (the radius of the stars directed away from the other star
along the axis containing their mass centers, rback in Wilson-Devinney notation). The
fillout input mode (most often used for overcontact systems) allows size specification
based on percentage of how much the stars fill (or “underfill”) their inner Lagrangian
critical surfaces.

Setting a Star to Automatically Fill Its Inner Lagrangian

Surface

If you want a star to automatically fill its inner Lagrangian surface, enter a –1 into that
star’s input box under any of the four input modes discussed above.

Spots Menu
The Spots menu, introduced in Chapter 3 when discussing AE Phe, allows the user to
specify that spots will be introduced into the parameter set. This menu must be used
in order to access the Spots tab near the bottom of the User Input dialog. To enter a
spot into a model, the Enable Spots menu choice must first be chosen, as shown
below:

75
C H A P T E R 6 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – M O R E M E N U S

Figure 6.5 – The Spots menu necessary to Enable the Spots options

Immediately after checking on the Enable Spots menu choice the Spots tabbed pane
appears asking for spot parameters (which are discussed in detail in Chapter 10) as
shown below:

Figure 6.6 – Spot parameter input dialog

The Colatitude is the angle of the center of the spot measured along a line connecting
the poles of the star starting from the upper pole to the lower pole, i.e., from 0º to 180º.
The upper pole is defined as the positive end of the angular momentum vector that is

76
C H A P T E R 6 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – M O R E M E N U S

parallel to the rotational axis. The Longitude, ranging from 0º to 360º, is measured
counterclockwise as seen from looking down upon the upper pole starting at the line
connecting the stars, as shown below:

Figure 6.7 – Spot Longitude convention

The Spot radius is the radius of the spot in degrees, and the Temperature Factor is
the percentage of the photospheric temperature that the spot has. So, if the
Temperature Factor is 0.90 then the spot’s temperature is 90% that of the
surrounding photosphere and would represent a cool spot. If the Temperature
Factor is 1.10 then the spots temperature would be 10% hotter than the
photosphere’s temperature. The Star Number radio buttons 1 and 2 signify on
which star the spot resides (star 1 is the more massive star). The Orbit Sync
checkbox forces the spot to rotate in such a way that it always stays in the same
position on a star relative to the axis connecting the stars, i.e., the longitude of the
spot remains constant. This is only an issue with asynchronously rotating stars. If
the stars are rotating synchronously then the spots automatically rotate in sync. If
the stars rotate asynchronously, then the spots rotate with the star’s surface unless
the Orbit Sync box is checked, which will keep the spot at a constant longitude.
This feature exists in case a star may be rotating asynchronously and a hot or cool
spot needs to be modeled that is caused by a mass transfer or impact stream from
the companion star. An impact stream would create a hot or cool spot always in the
same region. This is actually seen in the model of the double contact binary RZ Sct.

If more than one spot is desired (and experience has shown that spot models almost
always require two spots) then an additional spot can be added via the Spot menu on
the User Input dialog. Select the Add New Spot option under that menu as shown
below:

77
C H A P T E R 6 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – M O R E M E N U S

Figure 6.8 – Add New Spot menu choice

When the Add New Spot option is chosen, another Spots parameter input window is
shown for the second spot. The various spots can be edited or perused by clicking on
the Previous Spot/Next Spot buttons. Spots can be deleted by first displaying the
spots input parameter dialog and then selecting the Delete Current Spot menu choice
in the Spots menu.

78
 7
Chapter
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G - E V E N M O R E M E N U S

User Input Dialog Window

– Tools, Windows and Help
Menu Options
The Tools, Windows and Help menu options of the User
Input window are discussed in detail.

I
n this chapter we will delve into the Tools, Windows and Help menu options of
the User Input window.

Tools Menu
The Tools menu gives the user access to several useful functions of Binary Maker 3.

Calculate Radii
The first tool is the Calculate Radii menu choice shown below:

79
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Figure 7.1 – Calculate Radii choice under the Tools menu

This function was put into place so that users could quickly calculate the geometrical
features of a binary system after input of just the mass ratio and either Omega
potentials, C potentials, Radii or Fillout. When this function is chosen (assuming
the parameters have already been input) the result will be a display like the following:

Figure 7.2 – Radii info page as a result of selecting the Calculate Radii tool

80
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

The output of this tool are the input mass ratio and its reciprocal if it was entered as
greater than 1.00, the four radii of each star, the Omega and C potentials of the
surfaces of both stars, the Omega and C potentials of the inner and outer Lagrangian
surface, the positions of the L1 and L2 lagrangian points, the Fillout values of each star,
the distance between the stars in units of the semimajor axis (the periastron distance
for eccentric systems), the surface areas and volumes of both stars, the mean radius of
the stars (the average of the radii a, b and c) and the mean radius of the stars calculated
from the volumes via the equation for the volume of a sphere.

The Radii info page can also be saved as a text file by clicking on the Save As menu
choice under File as shown below:

Figure 7.3 – Save As menu choice that allows saving the Radii info page to a text file

The Calculate Radii tool is most often used when trying to reproduce a set of binary
parameters from the literature when the authors don’t give one of the four input
parameters above. Sometimes an average radius is given (i.e., not rback) and the value of
rback has to be iterated by entering different values until the average radius in the
Calculate Radii page equals the authors’ average radius.

81
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Looping Enabled
The Looping Enabled tool puts the program into a continuous loop so that a star’s
orbit is continuously rendered. This is useful when presenting a talk on binaries or
presenting a poster at a meeting if you have access to a computer. A particular binary
system can be orbiting continuously on the computer while you are talking with people
or explaining a poster.

Output 3D Binary Points (all phases)

The Output 3D Binary Points (all phases) choice under the Tools menu of the
User Input window will create a text file containing all of the (X, Y) coordinates
of the surface area elements that are visible in the plane of the sky at each phase
that is rendered. This feature allows users to use other plotting software to plot
the binaries at any phase that was calculated. This can potentially create very large
files, depending upon how fine the grid sizes are and how small the phase
increment is. Typically for a grid size of 20 x 40 and 0.01 phase increment the text
file might be approximately 12 megabytes. On modern computers this should be
no problem, but you've been warned!
[Note that if you want to save just a single screen shot of (X, Y) points (i.e., the
view of the binary at one phase aspect), this can be easily performed by the
Export 3D Binary selection under the File menu of the Binary window.]
When this option is checked a Save dialog will appear asking for a filename. You
can also select the drive and folder where you want the file saved. When you
Render the binary completely, the option will automatically uncheck itself to
prevent saving another file because you forgot to turn off the feature.
The format of the file created is shown below:
Phase=0.355

STARS

-0.8704901908438837 0.11559291025499933

-0.8700825141012742 0.1153630392967907

….

….

….

-0.0976454288668216 0.345345276097984

-0.09727205600132133 0.3450975485398603

SPOTS

82
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

-0.08380128084089566 0.34390918842334567

-0.08315918981960813 0.3440680196187283

….

….

….

-0.09114083734076756 0.35051872270227763

-0.0918827345424239 0.3504400727611028

Phase=0.36

STARS

-0.8610623678251597 0.11124215224805444

-0.8606351470497184 0.11101709201033262

….

….

….

Etc. ad nausem…

This format needs a little explanation. The beginning of the sequence of points
starts with the phase of the data series and the word STARS. The data pairs are
the (X, Y) points in the coordinates of the plane of the sky. The X points are
separated from their corresponding Y points by a space on the same line. If the
stars have spots, the (X, Y) values of the spot surface area elements within that
phase are separated by a marker entitled SPOTS. The next phase is indicated by
another phase marker and the word STARS again followed by the (X, Y) pairs and
then the spot pairs if there are any. The (X, Y) points themselves are not
separated by star (i.e., star 1 from star 2), nor are the spot coordinates.

Single Step on Start

This tool allows the user to start the rendering sequence of a binary already in single
step mode at the normalization phase (always the first phase rendered). We placed this
option into the program because we could never click the Stop button in the Phase
Control dialog fast enough to pause the rendering in time to catch the star at that first
phase! This is especially useful if you are trying to create a PostScript output of the
system at the normalization phase.

83
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Windows Menu
The Windows menu of the User Input dialog gives direct control over which of the
various display windows of Binary Maker 3 are being shown at any given time. The
Windows menu appears as follows:

Figure 7.4 – Windows menu in the User Input dialog

Note that the first three checkboxes are already checked, denoting that the Light
Curve, Radial Velocity Curve and Binary Display windows are visible (the default
view). The other three windows (LC Residuals, RV Residuals and Surface
Outlines) are not checked and are therefore not visible. To make any of these
windows visible just click on the checkbox next to the desired window. Each of these
windows is discussed in detail below.

The last menu choice (Quick Mode) is not a window per se, but a special rendering
option that hides all of the display windows in order to greatly accelerate the rendering
process.

LC and RV Residuals windows

The LC and RV Residuals windows plot the difference between the observed and
theoretical points versus phase. In order to use these plots the Residuals mode must
be invoked via the Observer tabbed pane in the User Input dialog (see Chapter 10
concerning Binary Maker 3 parameters for a more detailed discussion on how to use
the Residuals mode).

84
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Figure 7.5 - Windows menu for controlling the display windows with LC
Residuals checked

When the LC Residuals checkbox is checked, the LC Residuals window will be

displayed as shown below after rendering:

Figure 7.6 - LC Residuals window displayed for CC Com: the number in the
bottom right hand corner is the sum of the squares of the residuals

85
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

This window may cover up an already displayed window (like the Light Curve
Plot) and can be moved by placing the cursor anywhere in the title bar and then
dragged to wherever you want by holding down the left mouse button and moving
the mouse.

Figure 7.7 - Windows menu for controlling the display windows with RV
Residuals checked
When the RV Residuals checkbox is checked, the RV Residuals window will be
displayed as shown below after rendering:

86
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Figure 7.8 - RV Residuals window displayed for CC Com: the number in the
bottom right hand corner is the sum of the squares of the residuals for the more
massive star, the number in the bottom left hand corner is the sum of the squares
of the residuals for the less massive star.
As with the LC Residuals window, the RV Residuals window will appear on
top of the Radial Velocity Plot window. It can be moved to wherever you want
by placing the cursor anywhere on its title bar, holding down the left mouse
button and dragging with the mouse.

87
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Surface Outlines

Figure 7.9 - Surface Outlines choice under the Windows menu in the User
Input window
Selecting Surface Outlines under the Windows menu in the User Input window
displays an additional window that displays a cross-sectional outline of the binary
system at phase 0.75P (or 0.25P for mass ratios greater than one). For circular
binaries with synchronous rotation the outlines of the stars are drawn as well as
the inner and outer critical Lagrangian surfaces. The surface area elements of the
stars are also plotted within the surface outlines. An example of this for the
overcontact binary AB And is shown below:

88
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Figure 7.10 - Surface Outline display for AB And

The outer two red crosshairs represent the centers of the two stars and the red
crosshair in between these is the position of the barycenter (center of mass) of the
system. The Surface Outline is drawn once for circular orbit systems whenever
the Render button is pushed. Another way of creating or updating the display is
to choose the Refresh from current inputs menu selection under the File menu,
as shown below:

Figure 7.11 - Refresh from current inputs menu selection under the File menu
that causes the Outlines window to be redrawn

89
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

When circular orbit binaries that have one or both stars in asynchronous rotation
are created, the outer Lagrangian surface ceases to have any meaning for the
system as a whole, and so it is not drawn. The stars' surfaces and their critical
surfaces are drawn, as for example the semi-detached system TT Hydrae shown
below:

Figure 7.12 - Surface Outlines for the semi-detached binary TT Hydrae; the
smaller, more massive star is rotating asynchronously
As with all of the display windows, the scale of the view can be changed using the
F1 (zoom in), F2 (zoom out) and F3 (resume default scale) function keys, or by
dragging an edge of the window using the cursor and simultaneously holding the
left mouse button down.
A very interesting scenario occurs when displaying the Surface Outlines windows
while rendering an eccentric orbit. Because eccentric orbit binaries typically
change their sizes and shapes throughout their orbit because of their varying
distances and hence changing tidal forces, the current size and distance (in cross
section) from each other are displayed as they change throughout their orbits.
This is seen in binaries like V380 Cyg where the more massive star changes its size
(especially near periastron), as shown below:

90
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Figure 7.13 - Inner critical surfaces of V380 Cyg at periastron and apastron
At periastron the larger star is more ellipsoidal and has a larger surface area than at
apastron. This increase in area coupled with the way the star presents itself as its
orbits results in an increase in flux that is seen in its light curve (shown below)
around phase 0.135P, which is near the phase of periastron (0.078P):

Figure 7.14 - V light curve of Guinan et al. (2000) of V380 Cyg showing the
increase in flux around periastron (phase 0.135P)
The user has control over which features of the Outlines window are displayed
and of what colors they consist. These are controlled via the Edit | Surface
Outlines Properties menu:

91
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Figure 7.15 - Surface Outlines Properties under the Edit menu in the Outlines
window
When this option is selected the following dialog is presented:

Figure 7.16 - Surface Outlines Properties Display pane

92
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

By clicking on the appropriate checkboxes the user can turn on/off the various
displays on the Outlines window. For example, turning off the 3D Binary
and both Mass Centers results in the following:

Figure 7.17 - Surface Outline display for AB And without the 3D stars and mass
centers
Selecting the Colors tab of the Surface Outlines Properties dialog brings up the
following pane:

93
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Figure 7.18 - Surface Outlines Properties Colors dialog

Any of the colors of the features in the Surface Outlines window can be changed
via this dialog by clicking on a colored rectangle and then selecting a color and
then pressing the Apply button. For example:

Figure 7.19 - Surface Outline display for AB And with many colors changed

94
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Hardcopy output of this display can be achieved be selecting the PostScript

output under the File menu:

Figure 7.20 - PostScript Output under the File menu in the Surface Outlines
window
When the PostScript Output menu choice is selected, the following dialog will
appear:

Figure 7.21 - Surface Outlines PostScript printing options dialog

Note that the default selection (Print in color checkbox is checked) is to
reproduce the screen colored version in PostScript. If you want a black and white
version (perhaps for publication) simply uncheck the box by clicking on it.
Clicking on the OK button brings up a standard Save dialog as shown below:

95
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Figure 7.22 - Surface Outlines Save dialog for PostScript file creation
Locate the folder/drive into which you wish to save the file and then type in an
appropriate filename and click on the Save button. If all goes well the following
window will be displayed:

Figure 7.23 - PostScript file creation a success!

Click on the OK button and your file has been saved. This particular PostScript
file looks like this:

96
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Figure 7.24 - Multicolored PostScript output of AB And

Help Menu

Figure 7.25 - Contents selection under the Help menu in the User Input
window
The Contents selection under the Help menu in the User Input window brings
up the Help system that gives the user access to a large number of features that
explain how to use the program as well as giving elementary instructions on how

97
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

to analyze light curves. When Contents is selected the following Help window is
displayed:

Figure 7.26 - Help window features

The Help window can be minimized, maximized or closed using the three
buttons on the far right of the title bar. The toolbar just under the title bar
consists of five buttons. Starting at the leftmost button, the Back button, returns
the view to the last page viewed. The adjacent button (the Forward button) goes
ahead a page (if applicable). The Print button sends the help page in the topics
pane to the printer. A standard printer dialog will appear so that you can select to
which printer the page will be sent. The Printer Setup button allows you to set
the properties of the printer. The last button adds the current help topic to a
Favorites file that you can later access directly by choosing the Favorites pane
(more on this later).
There are five tabbed panes in the left side of the Help window. These are
indicated in the figure below:

98
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Figure 7.27 - Tabs of the Help window named

Any of these five views (Table of Contents, Index, Word Search, Glossary or
Favorites) can be selected by clicking on its appropriate tab. If you forget what
any of these tab symbols mean, you can simply leave the cursor over one of the
tabs and a context sensitive label appears to show you what that tab symbol
means.
The default view of the left hand pane is the Table of Contents. This consists of
many folders that can be expanded by clicking on the little control switch as
follows:

99
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Figure 7.28 - User Input window folder expanded one branch

Notice that the control switch is now pointed down instead of to the right. The
User Input window folder has now expanded to reveal yet another series of
expandable folders as well as single help topics (the pages). You can click on any
of the folders and/or expand any of them farther revealing more and more help!
You might wonder if there is another way of finding out about a certain topic
rather than hunting for it within the Table of Contents pane. Just like a book,
often the easiest way to find a topic is to check the Index, and the Help system
has just such an Index. Clicking on the Index tab shown below can access the
Index pane, and an alphabetized listing appears in place of the Table of
Contents:

100
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Figure 7.29 - Index tabbed pane with "omega potentials" typed into the Find
input box
The listing can be searched manually by scrolling with the scroll bars on the right
hand side of the left pane, or a word or words can be typed into the Find input
box and then press the Enter key and if the word is in the list it will appear, as
shown below:

101
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Figure 7.30 - The result of pressing the Enter key after typing "omega potentials"
into the Find input box
Another powerful search tool is the Word Search pane. Clicking on its tab
(magnifying glass) reveals the following:

102
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Figure 7.31 - Word Search pane initial view

Type in a word or words that you wish to find in the help topics of Binary Maker
and then press the Enter key. For example, when the word "overcontact" was
typed and the Enter key pressed, the following display appeared:

103
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Figure 7.32 - Results of the Word Search for "overcontact"

The red circles indicate the completeness of the matching. The filled circle means
that in each case it found the exact word. The number after the red circle
indicates the number of times the word appears in that particular page. The top
ranking is displayed in the topics pane and everywhere the word occurs within that
page the word is highlighted as shown above. To select a different page simply
click on that page listing in the results pane of Word Search.
Let's try another search with two words to show the effects of not finding both
words on a page. When the words "near contact" were entered into the Find
input box and the Enter key was pressed, the following results were displayed:

104
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Figure 7.33 - Results of the Word Search for "near contact"

This time the two words were found exactly in the first four pages, but in the
remainder of the pages only one of the words was found (notice the circle is only
half filled in).
Clicking on the Glossary tab opens access to the glossary of terms used
throughout the program and Help topics. When the user clicks on a word the
definition and/or explanation of the term appears in the small pane in the bottom
left hand side of the Help window as shown below:

105
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Figure 7.34 - Glossary tab showing the definition of the term "systemic velocity"
The words can be scrolled through using the sliding scroll button on the right
hand side of the Glossary pane, or a word can be typed into the Find input box
and then press the Enter key to go to the definition if the word exists in the
Glossary.
Finally, the Favorites tab reveals the Help topics that have been added using the
Add to Favorites button on the toolbar (the rightmost button just under the title
bar). This is an easy way to give immediate access to those Help topics that are
used most frequently. When you have displayed a Help page that you wish to
save to the Favorites, simply press the Add to Favorites button and it will be
saved to the Favorites pane. The figure below illustrates the Favorites pane with
five Help pages listed:

106
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Figure 7.35 - Favorites pane showing five selected Help pages added with the
Add to Favorites button
The pages listed in the Favorites pane can be edited by right-button clicking on a
page listing which reveals a pop-up menu as shown below:

107
C H A P T E R 7 - U S E R I N P U T D I A L O G – E V E N M O R E M E N U S

Figure 7.36 - Edit pop-up menu that shows up when right-clicking on a page in
the Favorites pane
The highlighted Help page can be Cut, Copied, Pasted or Removed from the
Favorites list.

108
 8
Chapter
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Light Curve Plot and

Radial Velocity Plot
Windows
The many features of both the Light Curve Plot and Radial
Velocity Plot windows are discussed.

S
o far we have been using the output display windows of Binary Maker 3 quite
extensively, but there are many features embedded within these windows which
have not been used yet. In this chapter we will delve into the details of how to
manipulate the displays of the Light Curve Plot window and the Radial
Velocity Plot windows.

Light Curve Plot Window

Figure 8.1 – File menu in the Light Curve Plot window

109
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

File Menu
As we saw in the Quick Start introduction to Binary Maker 3 in Chapter 2, we can
read a data file containing light curves using the File menu contained in the Light
Curve Plot window. Select the choice under the File menu “Open data file…” and
a standard Open dialog window will appear. You can read in any data file of the form
(phase, flux) and it will be plotted in the window.

The second choice under the File menu is the “Open phase/magnitude file…”
option. This allows the user to read in a text file that contains data in the form (phase,
magnitude) instead of the regular format of (phase, flux). The program will
automatically convert the magnitudes into flux values and normalize the highest point
to 1.00. For example, when a phase, magnitude file of TY Pyx was read in using this
option with the format

0.29199 1.965
0.29352 1.960
0.29552 1.963
0.29829 1.963
0.29933 1.957
0.30054 1.965
0.30148 1.958
0.30260 1.962
0.30373 1.963
0.30478 1.966
0.30574 1.962
0.30678 1.969
0.30795 1.962
0.30904 1.963

etc.
The program will read in the data and automatically convert it into phase and flux
(linear scale), which is what is used throughout the analysis process. The data will
be searched and the brightest point will be arbitrarily assigned a value of 1.00. The
user can normalize to any flux using the Normalization Factor and anywhere in
phase using the Normalization Phase. Both of these are found in the User
Input Observer tabbed pane.
For example, when the phase/magnitude file of TY Pyx is read in, it will appear in
the Light Curve Plot window as shown below:

110
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.2 – The y bandpass light curve of TY Pyx automatically converted to flux
scale from magnitude scale
Note the Binary Maker 3 does not output magnitude files, only flux. If the light
curve of TY Pyx is saved to a Zip file using the User Input | File | Save Zip
file menu choice, then it will be saved as a phase/flux file within the Zip file. The
file name will be the same as the name of the magnitude file read in except that
the file extension will be set to .nrm. The phase/flux file can then be accessed by
reading in the Zip file.
The third choice under the File menu is the “Export synthetic data…” option.
Selecting this option will open a standard Save dialog allowing you to save the
theoretical light curve last generated with the program into a text file in the format
(phase, flux). This file can then be read back into the program later using the “Open
data file…” should you want to compare a theoretical light curve with some other
curve, or possibly compare several theoretical curves.

The fourth choice under the File menu is the “PostScript output…” option, and this
is identical to the PostScript output option already discussed in Chapter 5 in the User
Input window except that the default file to be saved is the large light curve only
instead of the combined light curve, radial velocity curves and 3D binary.

The formatting of the display of the Light Curve Plot window is achieved in several
ways, two of which have already been discussed; the user function keys F1 (zoom in),
F2 (zoom out) and F3 (resume default scale), and the rescaling box constructed by
clicking the left mouse button and dragging a rectangle around the data into which you
wish to zoom.

111
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Edit Menu
There is a way to exert nearly complete control over, not only the scale, but the way
that the axes are formatted, what colors are used, what symbols are plotted, tick mark
options, etc., and this is accessed by selecting the Graph Properties menu choice
under the Edit menu as shown below:

Figure 8.3 – Graph Properties choice under the Edit menu

When the Graph Properties option is selected the following window appears:

112
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.4 – Light Curve Graph Properties dialog showing the Scale tab
(default view)
The Light Curve Plot Graph Properties tabbed dialogs allow the user to adjust a
multitude of characteristics of the Light Curve Plot window. Each tabbed dialog
is described below.

Scale
The Scale tab pane of the Light Curve Graph Properties dialog gives the user
direct control over the scaling of the axes and the major and minor units used in
creating the tick marks along the axes. The top four input boxes refer to the same
quantities for the X-axis and Y-axis. The minimum value is the smallest value to
be plotted on the axis, the maximum the largest value. The Major Unit value is
the division for the larger tick marks, the Minor Unit is the smaller division for
the Minor tick marks in between the Major ones.
As an example, let's change the settings for the V Light Curve Plot of 44 i Boo
from Duerbeck (1978). This very short period overcontact binary has a very small
amplitude of light variation (in part because of Third Light contamination). So
when its .nrm file is read in, the light curve plots in the default scale and looks like
the following:

113
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.5 – 44 i Boo plotted at factory default scale

The properties of the X- and Y-axes of the default settings are shown below:

Figure 8.6 – 44 i Boo initial Scale settings

Note that the Y-axis runs from a Minimum of 0.4 flux units to a Maximum of
1.05 flux units (the factory default). The Major Unit is set at 0.1 flux units, which
is why the Flux axis has numbers at the longer tick marks in intervals of 0.1. The

114
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Minor Unit is set at 0.05-flux unit, which is why the Flux axis Major Units have
shorter tick marks in intervals of 0.05 in between them.
Let's change the Y-axis by changing these values directly. It appears that a useful
minimum value might be 0.80 flux units, so change the 0.4 to 0.8 by clicking on
that value and typing in 0.8. When you click on the Apply button the new
parameters will change the scaling of the graph and it will appear as shown below:

Figure 8.7 – 44 i Boo with 0.80 as new Y-Axis Minimum

(You could also have changed the scaling by using the rescaling box.)
Note that the Y-axis tick marks and values are now more widely spread since we
have greatly expanded the scale. Let's change the Minimum and Maximum
values again to better frame the light curve (The rescaling box is easier to use to
do this, but that's not what we're playing with in the example!) Change the
Minimum value in the Y-axis to 0.83 and the Maximum value to 1.03 as shown
below:

115
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.8 – Scale tab pane with 0.83 in Y-axis Minimum and 1.03 in Y-axis
Maximum
After clicking on the Apply button the Light Curve Plot will appear as shown
below:

Figure 8.9 – 44 i Boo rescaled light curve

116
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Let us now change the Major and Minor Units so that we have a more
illuminating Y-axis delineation. In the Light Curve Graph Properties Scale
pane, enter 0.05 for Major Units and 0.01 for Minor Units as shown below:

Figure 8.10 – Scale pane with new values for Major and Minor Units of the Y-
axis
The following shows the results of this change:

Figure 8.11 – 44 i Boo Light Curve Plot with refined tick marks on Flux scale

117
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

The number of tick marks is better, but now the actual labels (the numbers) make
no sense because they're repeating. This is because the default number of
significant figures is one decimal place. This can be easily changed via the Tick
Labels pane of Light Curve Graph Properties, so let's click on that pane and fix
the significant values right away because as it stands it's useless. When you click
on the Tick Labels pane you will see the following:

Figure 8.12 – Tick Labels pane of Light Curve Graph Properties

Note that on the right hand side of the Tick Labels pane are the values
associated with the Y-axis. The effects of changing these many quantities are
described in detail elsewhere. For this example, let's only change the Label
Format that determines the significant figures of the labels displayed on the axes.
We want two significant figures for the Flux axis, so change the 0.0 currently in
the Label Format input box to 0.00, and then click on the OK button. The
Light Curve Plot will now appear as shown below:

118
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.13 – 44 i Boo Light Curve Plot with adjusted significant figures on the
Flux axis
The Flux axis now makes good sense, as do the Minor Units in between them!
Modifying the X-axis works in exactly the same way, except for the bottom input
box labeled Offset. Because different workers in the field plot light curves in
many different ways, this Offset value allows users to shift the Phase to better
display the light curve as desired. The factory default is an Offset of -0.25 in
Phase. This allows the minima to be better displayed simultaneously. But some
workers plot their light curves with no Offset. In the case of 44 i Boo the plot
would look like the following with a zero Offset:

Figure 8.14 – 44 i Boo Light Curve Plot with X-axis (Phase) Offset = 0.00

119
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Another useful change might be diminishing the number of major tick marks in
the X-axis (Phase). This is often done when preparing a plot for publication via
PostScript file creation. Let's create tick marks only at 0.25 intervals in phase. In
the Scale tabbed pane we would enter 0.25 for major ticks and 0.0 for minor ticks
as shown below:

Figure 8.15 – X-axis (Phase) set for Major Units at 0.25 intervals and no minor
tick marks
The results of these settings for TW Cas are shown below:

Figure 8.16 – TW Cas V light curve with 0.25 Major Units in Phase and no
minor tick marks

120
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Axis Title

Figure 8.17 – Axis Title pane in Light Curve Graph Properties

The Axis Title pane in the Light Curve Graph Properties dialog gives the user
control over the content and appearance of the axes titles on the Light Curve
Plot window. The features under each axis title (X- and Y-axis) are the same.
The checkbox next to the words "Show Axis Title" toggles the axis title on or off
(it's “on” if the box is checked). The title itself can be edited within the input box,
where you can type in whatever you please. The font of the title is selected by
clicking on the box next to Font Name, and a list of all available fonts on your
computer will appear and you can choose from that listing. The fonts can be
regular (default) or Bold and/or Italic by checking the checkboxes next to the
words Bold and Italic. The Font Size box allows for the changing of font size,
and the color of the font can be changed by clicking on the colored rectangle next
to Font Color and then choosing any color that you want from the color dialog
that appears.
After any changes have been entered, simply click on the Apply button to see the
results in the Light Curve Plot window.
The following shows many changes to the Axis Titles just to illustrate that you
can change them to look almost anyway that you want:

121
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.18 – TW Cas Light Curve Plot with changed Axis Titles

Tick Labels

Figure 8.19 – Tick Labels tabbed pane of Light Curve Graph Properties
window
The format of the display major tick mark labels are controlled by the Tick
Labels tabbed pane. The controls are identical in usage for both axes. The
Label Format input box establishes the significant figures of the displayed

122
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

numbers. The Font of the tick labels can be chosen by clicking on the Font
Name list, Bold and/or Italic can be toggled on/off with their respective
checkboxes, the Font Size and Font Color can also be chosen by clicking on
their respective boxes.
For example, the default display shown above (two decimal places for Phase (X-
axis) and one for Flux (Y-axis)) appears as follows:

Figure 8.20 – TW Cas V light curve shown with default tick labels
Just for illustrative purposes, let's change the display to three significant figures in
the Y-axis and one in the X-axis and play with the other features. The Tick
Labels dialog would appear as follows:

123
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.21 – Tick Labels parameters changed for the fun of it

The results of the above Tick Labels changes are shown below:

Figure 8.22 – Tick Labels changed

Note that changing the significant figures in the Y-axis (Flux) diminished the
plotting area of the graph. Such is the trade-off for more significant figures.

124
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Tick Marks

Figure 8.23 – Tick Marks pane showing default values

The appearance of the Tick Marks in the Light Curve Plot window is controlled
via this tabbed pane. In Length designates the length in pixels of the Tick
Marks extending into the plotting area, Out Length the length of the Tick
Marks in pixels extending away from the plotting area. The color of the Tick
Marks is set via clicking on the Tick Color rectangle. The controls are the same
for both axes and for Major and Minor Tick Marks. Both In and Out Tick
Marks can also be used simultaneously if desired.
This feature is extremely useful in preparing graphs for publication, or just for
setting personal preferences. Setting only inward Tick Marks in the dialog might
look like this:

125
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.24 – Tick Marks pane with inward tick marks only
This would result in the plot shown below:

Figure 8.25 – EM Car y Light Curve Plot demonstrating inward tick marks

126
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Coordinate Tag

Figure 8.26 – EM Car y Light Curve Plot showing the yellow Coordinate Tag
rectangle
When the Light Curve Plot window has the focus (title bar is highlighted) and the
cursor is placed anywhere within the plotting area, a Coordinate Tag appears
which shows the Phase, Flux values for the current position of the center of the
crosshairs. The appearance of the Coordinate Tag can be changed using the
Coordinate Tag pane of the Light Curve Graph Properties dialog as shown
below:

127
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.27 – Coordinate Tag pane of the Light Curve Graph Properties
dialog
In the upper leftmost corner is a checkbox that toggles the Coordinate Tag
on/off. The number of significant figures (format) of the numbers within the
Tag are set by typing in the desired number of digits (the default is three decimals
with no leading zero (the # sign)). The Font can be changed via clicking on the
Font Name box, Bold and/or Italics can be set by checking their appropriate
checkboxes, the Font Size and Color can also be changed by clicking on their
respective boxes as well. Finally the Background and Border colors of the Tag
rectangle itself are set by clicking on their respective color rectangles.
As an example, the following changes to the Coordinate Tag

128
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.28 – Arbitrary changes to the format of the Coordinate Tag

produce the Coordinate Tag display shown below:

Figure 8.29 – New format of the Coordinate Tag (for poor eyesight?)

129
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Symbols

Figure 8.30 – Symbols pane of the Light Curve Plot Graph Properties dialog
The shape, color, size and whether or not the data are plotted are all controlled via
the Symbols pane. When data are first read into the Light Curve Plot they are
assigned default shapes, sizes, and colors. The observed data (called whatever its
file name was) is assigned red plus signs ("+") and the synthetic curve (called the
LC Model Data) is assigned blue hollow squares. These default characteristics
(name, color, symbol, size and whether or not it's displayed) can all be changed by
the user.
For example, when the V data for the heavily spotted binary ER Vul was read in,

130
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.31 – ER Vul with heavily spotted secondary star

the Light Curve Plot appeared as shown below (after rescaling and changing the
tick labels to two decimal precision):

Figure 8.32 – ER Vul V data with default symbols (size, color and shape)
When the synthetic light curve was rendered, it appeared as blue hollow squares
within the Light Curve Plot as shown below:

131
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.33 – ER Vul V data and synthetic light curve with default symbols (size,
color and shape)
This synthetic light curve was then saved to a file (as [Link]) and then
read back in. The light curve was rendered again, but this time the spots were
turned off (disabled) to show just how much the spots influenced the light curve.
The resulting Light Curve Plot now looked like the following:

Figure 8.34 – ER Vul showing the observed light curve (red), spotted synthetic
curve (green), and unspotted synthetic curve (blue)
For illustrative purposes, let's show how to use the Symbols pane to change the
appearance of this last plot. Let's change the color and symbol of the spotted

132
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

synthetic curve that was read in. To do this we must first select the specific file
([Link]) which contains the data by clicking on the filename dropdown list
as shown below:

Figure 8.35 – Filename dropdown list showing the three sets of data on the Light
Curve Plot
Click on the filename [Link] and then this filename will appear by itself in
the list box as shown below:

133
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.36 – Symbols pane with the file [Link] selected

The symbol in the symbol dropdown list has changed to the green plus sign, it's
being drawn 4 pixels each way from the center of the cross, and it is being
displayed (Display checkbox is checked). Let's first change the color of the
Crosshair to cyan. Click on the Color rectangle and the following Color dialog
appears:

Figure 8.37 – Choose color dialog with cyan chosen (clicked on cyan square at
left)
Place the cursor over the colored square that you wish and click, and then click on
the OK button. The Crosshair will turn from green to cyan. Now let's change
the symbol to a hollow square (to match the hollow square used for the unspotted
synthetic curve) by clicking on the symbol dropdown box and we see the
following dropdown list:

134
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.38 – Symbols dropdown list with Hollow Square chosen (cyan)
Click on the Hollow Square symbol and press the Apply button, and now the
spotted synthetic curve will be cyan colored hollow squares.
Finally, let's change the size of the observed data crosshairs so that they will stand
out a little more. Click on the filename dropdown list and select the file that's
called [Link]. Then change the size of the symbol from 4 to 6 pixels.
The crosshair will now be 6 pixels each way away from the center of the crosshairs
instead of the default value of 4 as shown below:

135
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.39 – Enlarging the crosshair symbol for the observed data (read from file
[Link])
The final revised Light Curve Plot will appear as follows:

Figure 8.40 – ER Vul V light curve plot (data = enlarged red crosshairs) with
spotted (cyan colored hollow squares) and unspotted (blue colored hollow
squares) synthetic light curves
This gives a quick overview of many of the possibilities of editing the symbols
within the Light Curve Plot. The checkbox next to the word Display at the
bottom can be very useful for hiding certain datasets when doing light curve
analysis.

136
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

General

Figure 8.41 – General tab in the LC Graph Properties window

The General tab gives the user the ability to change the colors of the Light
Curve Plot's colors for the general properties of the graph, namely the Graph
Background, Graph Border and Window Background. (There are no
Reference Lines in the Light Curve Plot. The only reference line that exists is
the systemic velocity dashed line in the Radial Velocity Plot.) To illustrate how
to change these features, let's take the light curve of 44 i Boo and change all of its
general properties.
The default view of the plot (rescaled) looks like this:

137
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.42 – Default colors of the Light Curve Plot of 44 i Boo

Let's first change the Window Background from gray to white. Clicking on the
color rectangle next to the Window Background label brings up the standard
Color dialog below, in which we have selected white as the new color:

Figure 8.43 – Color dialog with white selected for the Window Background

138
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

This results in the following change in the Light Curve Plot of 44 i Boo:

Figure 8.44 – Window Background color changed from gray to white in the
Light Curve Plot of 44 i Boo
Changing the border and reference line colors arbitrarily resulted in the following:

Figure 8.45 – Border colors changed from black to red in the Light Curve Plot
of 44 i Boo

139
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Clear Plot Window

Figure 8.46 – Clear Plot Window choice under the Edit menu
The Clear Plot Window selection under the Edit menu gives the user the option to
clear the Light Curve Plot of all light curves that have been read into that display.
Although any and all light curves can be hidden via the Symbols pane in the Edit
Graph Properties dialog, this option was placed here to give quick and easy access
to clearing the plot.
When the Clear Plot Window choice is selected, you will be prompted by the
following dialog:

Figure 8.47 – Clear plot data dialog

This dialog gives the user the chance to not clear the window. To clear the window,
simply click on the Yes button.

140
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Radial Velocity Plot Window

Figure 8.48 – Radial Velocity Plot window for 44 i Boo

The Radial Velocity Plot window displays the observed radial velocity curves for
both stars in the binary system, as well as the theoretically generated mass-centered
and light-centered radial velocity curves. These various curves are explained in detail
in Chapter 10 as well as under the Binary Maker 3 Parameters Explained Help
section within the program itself.
The radial velocity of the system is plotted on the ordinate scale (y-axis) in
kilometers per sec (km/s) when there is actual data available, and in "normalized"
velocity scale otherwise. The orbital phase is plotted on the abscissa scale (x-
axis). As with all of the display windows it can be resized by placing the cursor on
an edge or corner of the window and, while holding the left mouse button down,
moving the mouse. It can also be maximized by clicking on the middle button in
the upper right hand corner of the title bar.
The scale of the plot can be changed in several ways. The easiest way is to press
the F1, F2 and F3 function keys. F1 zooms in but keeps the ordinate scale of 0.00
in the middle of the plot, F2 zooms out in the same way, and F3 resumes the
default scale. All display windows share this ability to rescale using the function
keys.
Another extremely useful rescaling tool is the ability to draw a resizing box around
any part of the plot. The box is drawn by placing the cursor over the area that you
wish to enlarge (zoom in on), holding down on the left mouse button and
simultaneously moving the mouse to create a dashed line rectangle around the area

141
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

desired. For example, consider the initial plot of 44 i Boo as read in from its Zip
file using the default scale:

Figure 8.49 – Radial velocity curves of 44 i Boo in default scale

Place the cursor near the upper left hand corner of the plot so that it is slightly
above the data and then, holding down the left mouse button, drag the mouse
over and down until you have drawn a rectangle as shown below:

Figure 8.50 – Rescaling box drawn around radial velocity curves of 44 i Boo
Immediately after you release the mouse button the plot will rescale and look like
the following:

142
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.51 – Rescaled plot of 44 i Boo radial velocity curves

If you make a mistake and are unhappy with your scaling attempt, you can always
start over again by pressing the F3 function key to resume the default scale. It
takes a little practice to make the spacing above and below look beautiful.
This radial velocity curve looks like this when maximized (maximize button is the
middle one of the three in the top right hand corner of the window):

143
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.52 – Maximized radial velocity graph with data from 44 i Boo
You can zoom into any section of the radial velocity curves using the rescaling
box method. For example, if you draw a box around the middle part of the plot
(as shown below)

Figure 8.53 – Rescaling box drawn around the more massive star's radial velocity
data of 44 i Boo

144
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

you will get just the primary star's curve as shown below:

Figure 8.54 – Appearance of the Radial Velocity Plot of 44 i Boo after releasing
the mouse button on the rescaling box drawn around the more massive stars'
radial velocity data
Yet another more precise and flexible way to rescale the plot is to select the Edit
menu. The myriad of editing options (rescaling, changing labels, tick marks,
symbols, colors, etc.) found under this option are discussed in the Edit menu
section later on in this chapter.

File Menu

Figure 8.55 – Radial Velocity Plot File menu choices

145
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

The Radial Velocity Plot File menu gives the user access creating PostScript files
and exporting synthetic radial velocity curves.

Open Data File

The Open data file choice under the File menu in the Radial Velocity Plot
window allows the user to read in a radial velocity data file (rv file) which contains
the period, velocity semiamplitudes, systemic velocity, and the actual data (star,
phase, radial velocity). The format of the rv file appears as follows:
0.267818 = period
112.70 231.31= K1 K2
-17.89 = systemic velocity
1 0.1943 91.3 (star phase rv)
1 0.2055 92.5
1 0.2164 94.5
1 0.2276 89.7
...
...
1 0.2411 92.5
1 0.8698 -97.0
1 0.6388 -107.5
2 0.1943 -241.5
2 0.2055 -243.7
...
...
2 0.2164 -246.6
2 0.2295 -244.9
2 0.2411 -246.1
2 0.8698 159.8
2 0.6388 164.4
When the Open data file menu choice is selected a standard Open dialog (shown
below) which allows the user to navigate through the drives and folders to open
whatever file you want:

146
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.56 – Open dialog that appears after selecting the menu choice Open
data file
Type in the filename that you want to open, or double click on the file in the list
window. The file will be read and the data contained within it will appear in the
Radial Velocity Plot window.

147
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Open Synthetic RV File

Figure 8.57 – Open synthetic RV file choice under the File menu in the Radial
Velocity Plot window

The Open synthetic RV file choice under the File menu in the Radial Velocity
Plot window gives the user the ability to read in a formerly constructed set of
synthetic radial velocity curves (see Export synthetic data). The file includes the
mass centers and light centers radial velocity curves for both stars. Clicking this
menu selection brings up a standard Open dialog allowing you to open the desired
synthetic radial velocity curves.

148
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.58 – Open dialog for reading in synthetic radial velocity curves
The synthetic curves are displayed as blue crosshairs as shown below:

Figure 8.59 – Synthetic radial velocity curves plotted after the file was read in
Of course the data are also blue crosshairs, so the user will probably want to
change the properties of the symbols via the Edit Graph Properties dialogs.

149
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Export Synthetic RV file

Figure 8.60 – Export synthetic data choice under the File menu in the Radial
Velocity Plot window
The Export synthetic data choice under the File menu in the Radial Velocity
Plot window takes the calculated synthetic mass centers and light centers radial
velocity curves and allows the user to save them to a file which can be later read
back into the Radial Velocity Plot window. When the menu selection is chosen
the following standard Save dialog appears:

150
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.61 – Save dialog for exporting a synthetic radial velocity dataset
The file can then be read later by using the Open synthetic RV file menu choice.

Radial Velocity PostScript Output

One of Binary Maker's most useful features is its ability to generate PostScript
files for graphics. These graphics files can also be edited with programs like
Adobe's PhotoShop or Illustrator.
In order to produce PostScript plots you must read in data and/or render the binary
first to create the graphs that you wish to output. Once that has been
accomplished, you can select the PostScript Output menu choice:

151
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.62 – PostScript Output choice under the File menu of the Radial
Velocity Plot window
You will then see the following dialog displayed:

Figure 8.63 – PostScript printing options dropdown list in the Radial Velocity
Plot window
The dropdown default choice is the most common choice for the particular
window in which the PostScript Output menu choice is selected. However all of
the PostScript options are available via any of the Postscript Output menu
selections in any of the windows. Note also that there is an option to not print
the PostScript plot in color. Printing in color is the default, but if that box is
unchecked by the user then the PostScript file will be saved entirely in black and
white (which is typically what is needed for publication). If this is the PostScript
output that is desired, then click on the OK button and the following standard
Save dialog will be displayed:

152
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.64 – Save dialog for a radial velocity PostScript file

The folder and drive can be chosen via this dialog. The filename should have the
extension .ps or .eps to designate the file as a PostScript file. After typing in an
appropriate filename and pressing the Save button you will see the following
information box to confirm that the PostScript file was successfully created and
saved:

Figure 8.65 – PostScript file successfully created and saved!

The PostScript output of the radial velocity curves of AI Hya with the synthetic
radial velocity curves is shown below:

153
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.66 – PostScript output for AI Hya

Other choices in the PostScript printing options dropdown list, visible by
clicking on the downward pointing arrowhead, are shown below:

Figure 8.67 – Other options within the PostScript printing options dropdown
list

154
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Edit Menu

Figure 8.68 - Edit menu in the Radial Velocity Curve Plot window
The Edit menu in the Radial Velocity Plot window gives the user access to the
Graph Properties selection through which many of the plot's attributes (colors,
symbols, scales, symbols, what is to be plotted, etc.) can be adjusted. The Radial
Velocity Plot Graph Properties tabbed dialogs allow the user to adjust a
multitude of characteristics of the Radial Velocity Plot window.

155
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Scale

Figure 8.69 - Radial Velocity Graph Properties dialog showing the Scale tab
(default view)
The Scale tab pane of the Radial Velocity Graph Properties dialog gives the
user direct control over the scaling of the axes and the major and minor units used
in creating the tick marks along the axes. The top four input boxes refer to the
same quantities for the X-axis and Y-axis. The minimum value is the smallest
value to be plotted on the axis, the maximum the largest value. The Major Unit
value is the division for the larger tick marks, the Minor Unit is the smaller
divisions for the Minor tick marks in between the Major ones.
As an example, let's change the settings for the Radial Velocity Plot of the very
eccentric binary V1143 Cyg. When its .rv file is read in, the Radial Velocity plots
in the default scale and looks like the following:

156
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.70 - V1143 Cyg plotted at factory default scale

The properties of the X- and Y-axes of the default settings are shown below:

Figure 8.71 - V1143 Cyg initial Scale settings

Note that the Y-axis runs from a Minimum of -231.19 kilometers/sec to a
Maximum of 231.19 kilometers/sec. The Major Unit is set at 50 km/s, which is
why the Radial Velocity axis has numbers at the longer tick marks in intervals of
50 km/s. The Minor Unit is set at 10 km/s, which is why the Radial Velocity
axis Major Units have shorter tick marks in intervals of 10 km/s in between
them.

157
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Let's change the Y-axis by changing these values directly. It appears that a useful
minimum value might be -160 km/s, so change the -231.19 to -160 by clicking on
that value and typing in -160. Change the Maximum value from 231.19 to 120.
When you click on the Apply button the new parameters will change the scaling
of the graph and it will appear as shown below:

Figure 8.72 - V1143 Cyg with new maximum and minimum radial velocity values
(You could also have changed the scaling by using the rescaling box, described
elsewhere.)
Note that the Y-axis tick marks and values are now more widely spread since we
have expanded the scale. Let us now change the Major and Minor Units so that
we can see what effects occur. In the Radial Velocity Graph Properties Scale
pane, enter 25 for Major Units and 5 for Minor Units as shown below:

158
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.73 - Scale pane with new values for Major and Minor Units of the Y-
axis
The following shows the results of this change:

Figure 8.74 - V1143 Cyg Radial Velocity Plot with refined tick marks on Radial
Velocity scale
The tick marks are now graduated more finely.

159
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Another useful change might be diminishing the number of major tick marks in
the X-axis (Phase). This is often done when preparing a plot for publication via
PostScript file creation. Let's create tick marks only at 0.25 intervals in phase. In
the Scale tabbed pane we would enter 0.25 for major ticks and 0.0 for minor ticks
as shown below:

Figure 8.75 - X-axis (Phase) set for Major Units at 0.25 intervals and no minor
tick marks
The results of these settings for V1143 Cyg are shown below:

160
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.76 - V1143 Cyg Radial Velocity Plot with 0.25 Major Units in Phase
and no minor tick marks

Axis Title

Figure 8.77 - Axis Title pane (default view) in Radial Velocity Graph
Properties
The Axis Title pane in Radial Velocity Graph Properties dialog gives the user
control over the content and appearance of the axes titles on the Radial Velocity
Plot window. The features under each axis title (X- and Y-axis) are the same.

161
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

The checkbox next to the words "Show Axis Title" toggles the axis title on or off
(it's on if the box is checked). The title itself can be edited within the input box,
where you can type in whatever you please. The font of the title is selected by
clicking on the box next to Font Name, and a list of all available fonts on your
computer will appear and you can choose from that listing. The fonts can be
regular (default) or Bold and/or Italic by checking the checkboxes next to the
words Bold and Italic. The Font Size box allows for the changing of font size,
and the color of the font can be changed by clicking on the colored rectangle next
to Font Color and then choosing any color that you want from the color dialog
that appears.
After any changes have been entered, simply click on the Apply button to see the
results in the Radial Velocity Plot window.
The following shows many changes to the Axis Titles just to illustrate that you
can change them to look almost anyway that you want:

Figure 8.78 - Radial Velocity Axis Title pane showing several changes from the
default values

162
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.79 - GG Ori Radial Velocity Plot with changed Axis Titles

Tick Labels

Figure 8.80 - Tick Labels tabbed pane of Radial Velocity Graph Properties
window
The formats of the display major tick mark labels are controlled by the Tick
Labels tabbed pane. The controls are identical in usage for both axes. The
Label Format input box establishes the significant figures of the displayed

163
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

numbers. The Font of the tick labels can be chosen by clicking on the Font
Name list, Bold and/or Italic can be toggled on/off with their respective
checkboxes, the Font Size and Font Color can also be chosen by clicking on
their respective boxes.
For example, the default values shown above (two decimal places for Phase (X-
axis) and zero for Radial Velocity (Y-axis)) creates a display as shown below:

Figure 8.81 - RS Cha Radial Velocity curves shown with default tick labels
Just for illustrative purposes, let's change the display to show two decimal places
in the Y-axis and one in the X-axis and play with the other features. The Tick
Labels dialog would appear as follows:

164
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.82 - Tick Labels parameters changed for the fun of it

The results of the above Tick Labels changes are shown below:

Figure 8.83 - Tick Labels changed

Yes, it's ugly, but you get the idea. Note that changing the significant figures in
the Y-axis (Radial Velocity) diminished the plotting area of the graph. Such is
the trade-off for more significant figures.

165
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Tick Marks

Figure 8.84 - Tick Marks pane showing default values

The appearance of the Tick Marks in the Radial Velocity Plot window are
controlled via this tabbed pane. In Length designates the length in pixels of the
Tick Marks extending into the plotting area, Out Length the length of the Tick
Marks in pixels extending away from the plotting area. The color of the Tick
Marks are set via clicking on the Tick Color rectangle. The controls are the same
for both axes and for Major and Minor Tick Marks. Both In and Out Tick
Marks can also be used simultaneously if desired.
This feature is extremely useful in preparing graphs for publication, or just for
setting personal preferences. Setting only inward Tick Marks in the dialog might
look like this:

166
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.85 - Tick Marks pane with inward tick marks only
This would result in the plot shown below:

Figure 8.86 - ZZ Boo Radial Velocity Plot demonstrating inward tick marks
Or if you like tick marks inward and outward simply put nonzero values in each
input box (In and Out Lengths) resulting in:

167
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.87 - ZZ Boo Radial Velocity Plot demonstrating inward and outward
tick marks

Coordinate Tag

Figure 8.88 - 44 i Boo Radial Velocity Plot showing the yellow Coordinate Tag
rectangle
When the Radial Velocity Plot window has the focus (title bar is highlighted)
and the cursor is placed anywhere within the plotting area, a Coordinate Tag
appears which shows the Phase, Radial Velocity values for the current position
of the center of the crosshairs. The appearance of the Coordinate Tag can be

168
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

changed using the Coordinate Tag pane of the Radial Velocity Graph
Properties dialog as shown below:

Figure 8.89 - Coordinate Tag pane of the Radial Velocity Graph Properties
dialog with default values
In the upper leftmost corner is a checkbox which toggles the Coordinate Tag
on/off. The number of significant figures (format) of the numbers within the
Tag are set by typing in the desired number of digits (the default is three decimals
with no leading zero (the # sign)). The Font can be changed via clicking on the
Font Name box, Bold and/or Italics can be set by checking their appropriate
checkboxes, the Font Size and Color can also be changed by clicking on their
respective boxes as well. Finally the Background and Border colors of the Tag
rectangle itself are set by clicking on their respective color rectangles.
As an example, the following changes to the Coordinate Tag

169
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.90 - Arbitrary changes to the format of the Coordinate Tag

produce the Coordinate Tag display shown below:

Figure 8.91 - New format of the Coordinate Tag

170
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Symbols

Figure 8.92 - Symbols pane of the Radial Velocity Plot Graph Properties
dialog
The shape, color, size and whether or not the data are plotted are all controlled via
the Symbols pane. When data are first read into the Radial Velocity Plot they
are assigned default shapes, sizes, and colors. The observed data (called whatever
its file name was) are assigned blue crosshairs ("+") and the synthetic curves are
each assigned different symbols. The mass centered primary and secondary star
synthetic curves (called primary and secondary mass center in the dropdown
list) are both assigned as red crosshairs ("+"). The light centered primary star
synthetic curve (called primary rv data) is assigned as black hollow squares and
the light centered secondary star synthetic curve (called secondary rv data) is
assigned as black filled circles. These default characteristics (name, color, symbol,
size and whether or not it's displayed) can all be changed by the user.
For example, when the radial velocity data for the heavily spotted binary ER Vul
was read in,

171
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.93 - ER Vul with heavily spotted secondary star

the Radial Velocity Plot appeared as shown below (after rescaling):

Figure 8.94 - ER Vul radial velocity data with default symbols (size, color and
shape)
When the synthetic radial velocity curves were rendered, they appeared within the
Radial Velocity Plot as shown below:

172
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.95 - ER Vul radial velocity data and synthetic radial velocity curves with
default symbols (size, color and shape)
Because of the excellent fit to the data, it is difficult to resolve the different
symbols on this scale. A maximized view of this plot appears below:

Figure 8.96 - ER Vul radial velocity data and synthetic radial velocity curves with
default symbols (size, color and shape) maximized view

173
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

For illustrative purposes, let's show how to use the Symbols pane to change the
appearance of this last plot. Let's change the color and symbol of the light centers
synthetic curves. To do this we must first select the specific synthetic data set
which contains the data by clicking on the filename dropdown list as shown
below:

Figure 8.97 - Filename dropdown list showing the sets of data on the Radial
Velocity Plot
Click on the data set Primary RV Data and then this data set will appear by itself in
the list box as shown below:

174
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.98 - Symbols pane with the dataset Primary RV data selected
The symbol in the symbol dropdown list is a black hollow square, it's being drawn
4 pixels to a side, and it is being displayed (Display checkbox is checked). Let's
first change the color of the square to cyan. Click on the Color rectangle and the
following Color dialog appears:

Figure 8.99 - Choose color dialog with cyan chosen (clicked on cyan square at
left)
Place the cursor over the colored square that you wish and click, and then click on
the OK button. The hollow square will turn from black to cyan. Now let's
change the symbol to a filled square by clicking on the symbol dropdown box and
we see the following dropdown list:

175
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.100 - Symbols dropdown list with Filled Square chosen (cyan)
Click on the Filled Square symbol and press the Apply button, and now the
primary light centered synthetic curve will be cyan colored filled squares. Let's
change the secondary light centered point to green hollow circles. Click on the
dropdown data list again and select the Secondary RV Data set as shown below:

Figure 8.101 - Secondary RV Data set selected for Symbols editing

Changing these symbols to green hollow circles results in the following plot:

176
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.102 - Light centers synthetic curves with changed symbols and colors
Finally, let's change the size of the observed data crosshairs so that they will stand
out a little more. Click on the filename dropdown list and select the file that's
called [Link]. Then change the size of the symbol from 4 to 8 pixels. The
crosshair will now be 8 pixels each way away from the center of the crosshairs
instead of the default value of 4 as shown below:

177
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.103 - Enlarging the crosshair symbol for the observed data (read from file
[Link])
After making the same change to the Secondary RV - [Link] data set, the
final revised Radial Velocity Plot will appear as follows:

178
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.104 - ER Vul Radial Velocity Plot (data = enlarged blue crosshairs)
with synthetic radial velocity points
This gives a quick overview of many of the possibilities of editing the symbols
within the Radial Velocity Plot. The checkbox next to the word Display at the
bottom can be used to hide datasets if desired.

General

Figure 8.105 - General tab in the RV Graph Properties window

The General tab gives the user the ability to change the colors of the Radial
Velocity Plot's colors for the general properties of the graph, namely the Graph

179
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Background, Graph Border, Window Background and Reference Lines. To

illustrate how to change these features, let's take the radial velocity curve of 44 i
Boo and change all of its general properties.
The default view of the plot (rescaled) looks like this:

Figure 8.106 - Default colors of the Radial Velocity Plot of 44 i Boo

Let's first change the Window Background from gray to white. Clicking on the
color rectangle next to the Window Background label brings up the standard
Color dialog below, in which we have selected white as the new color:

180
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Figure 8.107 - Color dialog with white selected for the Window Background
This results in the following change in the Radial Velocity Plot of 44 i Boo:

Figure 8.108 - Window Background color changed from gray to white in the
Radial Velocity Plot of 44 i Boo

181
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Changing the border and reference line colors arbitrarily resulted in the following:

Figure 8.109 - Reference Lines and Border colors changed from black to red in
the Radial Velocity Plot of 44 i Boo

Clear Plot Window

Figure 8.110 – Clear Plot Window choice under the Edit menu
The Clear Plot Window selection under the Edit menu gives the user the option to
clear the Radial Velocity Plot of all radial velocity curves that have been read into
that display. Although any and all radial velocity curves can be hidden via the

182
C H A P T E R 8 - L I G H T C U R V E & R A D I A L V E L O C I T Y P L O T S

Symbols pane in the Edit Graph Properties dialog, this option was placed here to
give quick and easy access to clearing the plot.
When the Clear Plot Window choice is selected, you will be prompted by the
following dialog:

Figure 8.111 – Clear plot data dialog

This dialog gives the user the chance to not clear the window. To clear the window,
simply click on the Yes button.

183
 9
Chapter
C H A P T E R 9 - B I N A R Y 3 D W I N D O W

Binary 3D Window
The options of the Binary 3D window are discussed in detail.

T
he Binary 3D display window is arguably the most interesting display because
it shows what the binary would appear like if we were close enough to see the
actual stars revolving around each other. There are quite a number of features
available within this window that can enhance the way the stars and other
options are displayed.

Figure 9.1 - Binary window showing BF Pav

The Binary window displays the three-dimensional representation of the rotating
and revolving stars. The red crosshairs ("+") at the centers of the stars denote the
mass centers of the stars. The red crosshair between the two stars is the
barycenter (center of mass) of the system. The dotted curves ("breadcrumbs")
are the paths of the mass centers as the stars orbit their common barycenter. The

184
C H A P T E R 9 - B I N A R Y 3 D W I N D O W

Keplerian orbital phase currently displayed by the stars in the window is shown at
the bottom right hand corner of the screen.
The scale of the stars in the window can be changed by pressing the function keys
F1, F2 and F3. F1 zooms in on the stars, F2 zooms out, and F3 resumes the
default scale. The window can also be enlarged by placing the cursor on an edge
and pressing the left mouse button and dragging the edge to resize the window.
You can also maximize the window by clicking on the middle button in the upper
right hand corner of the title bar.

Binary window File menu

Figure 9.2 - File menu choice in the Binary window

The File menu gives the user access to the Export 3D Binary option and also the
PostScript output dialog as well as the choice to close (hide) the window. The
window can also be closed (hidden) by clicking on the red "X" button (close
button) in the upper right hand corner of the title bar.

Export 3D Binary
The Export 3D Binary choice under the File menu of the Binary window will
create a text file containing the surface area elements that are visible in the plane
of the sky at the phase that is currently displayed in the Binary window. This
feature will allow users to use other plotting software to plot the binaries at any
particular phase that is displayed in the Binary window.

185
C H A P T E R 9 - B I N A R Y 3 D W I N D O W

Note that, if you want to save the X,Y points at all phases rendered in one
complete orbit, this can be easily performed by the Output 3D Binary Points (all
phases) selection under the Tools menu of the User Input window.
When Export 3D Binary is selected a Save dialog will appear asking for a
filename. You can also select the drive and folder where you want the file saved.
The format of the file created is shown below:
Phase=0.355

STARS

-0.8704901908438837 0.11559291025499933

-0.8700825141012742 0.1153630392967907

….

….

….

-0.0976454288668216 0.345345276097984

-0.09727205600132133 0.3450975485398603

SPOTS

-0.08380128084089566 0.34390918842334567

-0.08315918981960813 0.3440680196187283

….

….

….

-0.09114083734076756 0.35051872270227763

-0.0918827345424239 0.3504400727611028

This format needs a little explanation. The beginning of the sequence of points
starts with the phase of the data series and the word STARS. The data pairs are
the X,Y points in the coordinates of the plane of the sky. The points are
separated by a space. If the stars have spots, the X,Y values of the spot surface
area elements within that phase are separated by a marker entitled SPOTS. The
X,Y points themselves are not separated by star, nor are the spot coordinates.

186
C H A P T E R 9 - B I N A R Y 3 D W I N D O W

Binary window PostScript output

Figure 9.3 - PostScript output File menu choice in the Binary window
The PostScript output menu choice gives the user access to the many options for
creating PostScript files for high-resolution graphics.
The orbital phase that will be created as PostScript output will be whatever phase
is currently displayed in the Binary window. If you want to create a different view
of the binary, you must render the system again using the Render button in the
User Input window, and probably use the single step button within the Phase
Control dialog to put the binary into exactly the phase that you desire to print.

Figure 9.4 - Phase Control window that appears after pressing the Render
button in the User Input window
You may also have to adjust (play with) the Phase increment under the
Observer Dialog tabbed input to allow you to achieve exactly the phase that you
want. You could also change the system's inclination (say to 0°) if you wanted a
pole-on view of the system.
Once you have the binary displayed at the phase and orientation that you want,
select the PostScript output menu choice under the Binary window File menu.
The following dropdown menu dialog will be displayed:

187
C H A P T E R 9 - B I N A R Y 3 D W I N D O W

Figure 9.5 – 3D Model of Binary only choice selected and ready for creating and
saving
Note that there is a checkbox labeled Print in color that is checked as the
default. If you want the PostScript file entirely in black and white (perhaps for
publication in a journal) then uncheck this box before you save the file. If this is
indeed the choice that your want, click on the OK button and a standard Save
dialog will appear as shown below:

Figure 9.6 - Save dialog for PostScript file

You can save the file wherever you want to by maneuvering to your desired folder
using the standard file manipulation buttons and pulldown menus in the Save
dialog. Type in an appropriate name for the PostScript file and click on the Save

188
C H A P T E R 9 - B I N A R Y 3 D W I N D O W

button. It is recommended that an extension of .ps or .eps be appended to the

name of the file so that you will know that it is indeed a PostScript file.
The PostScript Printing Options dropdown menu also gives access to all of the
other output options if the binary has been rendered. These options can be seen
if the bottom-pointing arrow at the right hand side of the dropdown list is clicked,
resulting in the following dropdown list:

Figure 9.7 - PostScript Printing Options dropdown menu

Binary window Edit menu

Figure 9.8 - Edit menu in the Binary window

189
C H A P T E R 9 - B I N A R Y 3 D W I N D O W

The Edit menu gives the user access to the Binary Display Properties dialog
that allows changing a multitude of display characteristics within the Binary
window, such as colors, what to display, etc.

Figure 9.9 - Binary Display Properties dialog

The Binary Display Properties dialog gives the user access to changing many of
the display characteristics of the Binary window. It consists of two tabbed
dialogs, Display and Colors. The Display tab sets which features of the Binary
window will be displayed. The Colors tab sets the colors of the various features
displayed.

Binary window Display Tab

The Binary Display Tab dialog gives the user access to changing many of the
display characteristics of the Binary window. When the checkbox next to the
feature listed is checked, it will be displayed in the Binary window. The factory
default setting is to display the mass centers of both stars, display the barycenter
(center of mass) of the two stars, display the orbital trails ("breadcrumbs") of
both stars and to display the Keplerian orbital phase in the bottom right hand
corner of the window. Any of these features can be turned on or off via this
dialog.
The Show sun circle feature will display a circle, centered about the barycenter,
the size of the Sun to scale with the binaries if a spectroscopic velocity
semiamplitude and orbital period have been entered into the program. If you

190
C H A P T E R 9 - B I N A R Y 3 D W I N D O W

click on the checkbox next to Show sun circle and then press the Apply button
and then OK,

Figure 9.10 - Show sun circle checkbox selected

the Binary display for AB And will look like the following:

Figure 9.11 - AB And with Sun circle displayed (the red circle centered on the
barycenter)

191
C H A P T E R 9 - B I N A R Y 3 D W I N D O W

If the Sun circle is turned on and no radial velocity information has been input,
the following error message appears:

Figure 9.12 - Sun circle error message

Binary Edit Display Properties Color tab

Figure 9.13 - Binary Color Tab dialog

The Binary Color Tab dialog gives the user the option to change many of the
colors of the features displayed in the Binary window. The color of each feature
is changed in the same way, so we will only go through illustrating how this is
accomplished with one feature, the Star Color.
Click on the black (the default color of the stars) rectangle with the mouse and the
following beautiful dialog will appear:

192
C H A P T E R 9 - B I N A R Y 3 D W I N D O W

Figure 9.14 - Choose color: Swatches Tab dialog

(Yes, we went a little nuts with color choices.) The color of the stars can be
changed to almost any color that you desire, in several different ways! Using the
Swatches Tab dialog, simply place the cursor over any colored square to select
that color for the stars. So for example if you chose a reddish-orange swatch the
dialog would change to the following:

193
C H A P T E R 9 - B I N A R Y 3 D W I N D O W

Figure 9.15 - Choose color: Swatches Tab dialog with orange color selected
When you click on the OK button, you will be returned to the Binary Color Tab
dialog, and the Star Color rectangle will reflect the color choice that you selected,
as shown below:

194
C H A P T E R 9 - B I N A R Y 3 D W I N D O W

Figure 9.16 - Binary Color Tab dialog with orange stars selected
Any of the other features can have their colors changed in the same way, resulting
in a display like the following:

Figure 9.17 - AB And shown at orbital phase 0.24 with the Sun circle (yellow)
showing the size of the Sun to the binary to scale

195
C H A P T E R 9 - B I N A R Y 3 D W I N D O W

There are other ways to change the colors. The HSB Tab in the Choose color
dialog presents the following display:

Figure 9.18 - Choose color: HSB Tab dialog with orange color selected
This dialog allows the user to set the color by clicking anywhere within the large
rectangle, as well as setting the HSB (Hue, Saturation and Brightness) numbers in
the upper right hand corner of the dialog. You can also see the corresponding
RGB numbers for any given HSB configuration. The rainbow colored column
allows for the changing of the primary color displayed in the large rectangle.
Simply move the cursor at the left of the rainbow up and down to select a primary
color.
The other way to set a color is to use the RGB (Red, Green, and Blue) Tab of the
Choose color dialog, which will display as shown below:

196
C H A P T E R 9 - B I N A R Y 3 D W I N D O W

Figure 9.19 - Choose color: RGB Tab dialog with orange color selected
You can simply set the numbers of R, G and B to whatever values you desire by
moving the cursors left or right or by typing in numbers or raising them or
lowering them using the up/down buttons.

197
 10
Chapter
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S

Binary Maker 3
Parameters Explained
The many input parameters used in Binary Maker 3 are
defined and illustrated.

T
his chapter is devoted to defining and explaining the many input parameters
needed to construct meaningful binary models. Hopefully this chapter will
help to clarify some misconceptions and mysteries related to the field of
binary star research and analysis.

Grid Values
The latitude grid number is the number of surface area elements to be calculated
from the pole of the star to its equator. A value of 20 is a good starting value for this
number. The longitude grid number is the number of surface area elements to be
calculated along the major (largest) axis of the star along its equator. To make the
number of longitude elements comparable to the latitude elements, you should
make this number twice as large as the latitude grid number, in this case 40 if the
latitude grid value is 20. A few examples are shown below:

198
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.1 – AB And displayed at phase 0.25P at 10 x 20 grid size

Figure 10.2 – AB And displayed at phase 0.25P at 20 x 40 grid size

199
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.3 – AB And displayed at phase 0.25P at 40 x 80 grid size

Figure 10.4 – AB And displayed at phase 0.25P at 80 x 160 grid size

200
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.5 – AB And displayed at phase 0.25P at 120 x 240 grid size

Obviously the larger the grid values the more accurate will be the modeling, but the
computation times will rise geometrically. When calculating systems with eccentric
orbits you will probably want to initially reduce the grid values to something like 10 x
20. This is because the surfaces of both stars in these systems must be recalculated
several times at each phase point as the stars’ shapes are adjusted to keep their volumes
constant while they change the distances between them as they progress in their
eccentric orbits.

Mass Ratio (q)

The mass ratio q is usually defined as the mass of the less massive star (M2) divided
by that of the more massive star (M1), i.e.,
M
q= 2
M1
Therefore this quantity is usually less than 1.00. However, if the less massive star is
hotter than the more massive component, then the deeper eclipse (by convention the
primary eclipse) will occur when the less massive star is eclipsed. In order to shift
the phases by 0.50 to account for this, the mass ratio is inverted, as for W-type W
UMa systems. In Binary Maker 3 this convention is observed, i.e., for hotter
secondaries you should input the inverse mass ratio, i.e., greater than 1.0, but star 1 is
still considered to be the more massive star and star 2 the less massive one.

Modified Omega Potential (Ω)

The modified equipotential Ω, along with a specified mass ratio, completely describe
the surface structure for synchronously rotating, circular orbit binary stars. It takes
into account both the gravitational and centrifugal forces in the binary. As the value

201
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

of the equipotential is increased, the size of the star decreases. This makes sense
since the gravitational potential increases as one approaches the mass center. Ωinner is
the value of the inner critical Roche equipotential and represents the point at which
the stars just come into contact. Ωouter is the value of the outer critical Roche
equipotential and represents the limit to stability to any overcontact system since the
outer potential has a "hole" in it (gravitational acceleration = 0) and gas will leave the
system. Representative equipotentials for a mass ratio q = 0.40 are shown below in
cross-section in Figure 10.6.

Figure 10.6 – Possible equipotentials for a binary system with mass ratio q = 0.40

C Potential (C)
Some workers (Mochnacki & Doughty 1972; Binnendijk 1977) use this parameter
instead of Ω to parameterize the equipotential surfaces. The following relations
relate it to Ω:

C = 2 B1Ω + B22
1
where B1 ≡
1+ q
q
B2 ≡
1+ q
M
q= 2
M1

202
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Fillout Factor (f)

The fillout parameter f used in Binary Maker 3 is a modification of the parameter
defined by Lucy & Wilson (1979) and can be used to specify equipotentials for
contact and overcontact binaries as well as detached systems after specifying a mass
ratio. The fillout represents the degree of “undercontact” (detached) or overcontact
of a component within a binary. For undercontact, the fillout represents the
percentage that the surface potential of the binary lies from the inner critical surface
minus unity. For overcontact, the fillout represents the percentage that the surface
potential of the binary lies from the inner critical compared to the outer one, i.e.,
Ω
f ≡ inner − 1 for Ω inner < Ω (undercontact )
Ω
Ω inner − Ω
f ≡ for Ω inner ≥ Ω (overcontact )
Ωinner − Ωouter

The fillout factor f for detached stars will lie between − 1 < f ≤ 0 . The fillout factor f
for overcontact systems will lie between 0 ≤ f ≤ 1 i.e., from in contact with the inner
critical surface (f = 0) to being in contact with the outer critical surface (f = 1). Six
examples of binary systems with different fillout factors (all with mass ratios equal to
0.40) are shown below, along with their inner and outer critical Lagrangian surfaces:

Figure 10.7 – Both stars have fillouts equal to -0.10 (detached system).

203
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.8 – The smaller star has a fillout of 0.0, the larger star a fillout of -0.02 (a
typical near-contact system).

Figure 10.9 – Fillout factor = 0.00 (definition of a contact system)

Figure 10.10 – Fillout factor = 0.15 (typical overcontact system)

204
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.11 – Fillout factor = 0.50

Figure 10.12 – Fillout factor = 0.80

Another definition of fillout factor or parameter was set forth by Mochnacki and
Doughty (1972) and is shown below:

Ω inner − Ω
F= +1 for Ω < Ω inner
Ω inner − Ω outer
Ω inner
F= for Ω > Ω inner
Ω

In this case the fillout F for overcontact stars lies between1 ≤ F ≤ 2 .

Rucinski (1973) defined yet another fillout factor similar to the one used in Binary
Maker 3:

205
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Ω − Ω outer
f Rucinski ≡
Ω inner − Ω outer

In this definition of fillout the values would be fRucinksi = 0.0 for the stars in contact
with their outer Lagrangian surfaces, and fRucinksi = 1.0 for the stars just filling their
inner contact surface, i.e., just in contact with each other at the inner Lagrangian
point L1. The relationships between the three fillout parameters are as follows:

f = F −1
f Rucinski = 2 − F = 1 − f

Fractional Radii (rback = a)

The distance between the mass centers of the two stars is defined to be unity for
circular orbits. Binary Maker 3 allows for specifying equipotential surfaces by the
input of the fractional stellar radius a or r[back] in Wilson-Devinney notation (see
Figure 10.13). This radius is along the line of centers between the two stars and is
the radius that is always facing away from its companion. This parameter cannot be
used when specifying contact or overcontact systems since the input radii would
have to be perfect in order to generate exactly the same potential for both stars. All
of the commonly specified stellar radii are depicted in Figure 10.13.

Figure 10.13 – Definitions of radii; diagram seen from plane of binary orbit

206
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Setting a Star to Fill Its inner Lagrangian Surface

If you want a star to automatically fill its inner Lagrangian surface, enter a –1 into that
star’s input box under any of the four input modes discussed above.

Effective Wavelength
The wavelength parameter refers to the effective wavelength in angstroms (Å) of the
filter used to acquire the data. The default value is 5500 Å corresponding to the
standard Johnson wideband V filter. Other effective wavelengths for typical
photometric systems are given in the tables below:

Johnson
U = 3600 Å
B = 4400 Å
V = 5500 Å
R = 7000 Å
I = 8800 Å
RKron-Cousins = 6400 Å
IKron-Cousins = 7900 Å

Strömgren
u = 3500 Å
v = 4100 Å
b = 4700 Å
y = 5550 Å

Walraven
V = 5400 Å
B = 4300 Å
L = 3820 Å
U = 3620 Å
W = 3250 Å

Temperature
The temperature parameter refers to the mean surface effective temperature of the
stars as discussed by Wilson (1979).

207
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Gravity Brightening (Darkening) Exponent

Von Zeipel (1924) proved that for totally radiative stars the surface flux was directly
proportional to the value of the gravitational acceleration (g) at the stellar surface.
(The gravitational acceleration is − ∇Ω ). The equation used to determine the local
temperature Tlocal on the surface of the stars is:
g α 0.25
T local = T eff (( ) )
gn
where Teff is the mean surface effective temperature of the star, g is the local gravity
at a specific surface area element and gn is the value of g at the poles. The Gravity
Brightening Exponent α is 1.00 for radiative stars and according to Lucy (1967) is
0.32 for convective stars. It is also wavelength independent. The approximate
temperature demarcation for radiative and convective stars is 7200 °K.

Limb Darkening (wavelength dependent)

Limb darkening is the diminishing of the brightness of a star’s surface as one looks
away from its center, towards the edge of the disk (or limb). This is caused by the
fact that stars are hotter the deeper into them you go, and when you are looking
towards the center of their disk, your line of sight protrudes most deeply into their
photospheres. When you look towards the edge of the disk your line of sight does
not venture as deeply below the surface of the star, and hence the temperature you
see is less and the gas gives off less light.

Binary Maker 3 uses the linear limb darkening law. The coefficient x is used in
the linear limb darkening equation

I (θ ) = I (0o )(1 − x − x cos θ )

where θ is the angle measured between your line of sight and the surface normal of a
particular surface area element. When you are looking straight at the center of the
star θ = 0° and the outer limb of the disk is at θ= 90°. These values are wavelength
and temperature dependent and theoretical values must be looked up in tables
because most light curves do not yield trustworthy values. The table of Al Naimiy
(1978) contains the values most commonly cited prior to 1993 and is reproduced in
the Appendices. The most commonly used values since 1993 are those of Van
Hamme and these tables are also reproduced in the Appendices. Both tables of limb
darkening coefficients are also included within the Help files of the program.

208
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Bolometric Albedo (Reflection Coefficient)

When the radiation from one star strikes the surface of the other, its energy will heat
up the receiving surface and, if the star is mostly radiative, re-radiate the energy like a
mirror. The bolometric albedo (sometimes called the reflection coefficient) is the
percentage of incident radiation that is re-radiated by the companion star. For
radiative stars the coefficient is assumed to be 1.00. Rucinski (1969) showed that for
convective stars the albedo will be approximately 0.50 because surface convection
will carry away some of the energy to re-radiate it from regions other than where it
was incident. Thus for stars whose temperatures are less than 7200 °K this
coefficient should be set to 0.50.

Luminosity (wavelength dependent)

The luminosity of a star is a measure of its total energy output. Binary Maker 3
outputs the luminosities L1 and L2 that indicate the percentage of the total luminosity
each star emits. The total luminosity is normalized to 1.00, so that L1 + L2 = 1.00.
These quantities are wavelength dependent.

Third Light (wavelength dependent)

This wavelength dependent parameter takes into account any contamination in the
data due to sources other than the binary stars themselves. This can be a third star
that is part of the binary or even a field star that could not be excluded from the
diaphragm when observing at the telescope because of its coincidental proximity to
the binary. Third light is in the same units as the input or output flux and is not a
luminosity fraction like L1 and L2.

Inclination
The inclination of a binary is a description in degrees of the tilt of its orbital plane
with respect to an Earth observer. Therefore, as shown in Figure 10.14, an
inclination of 0° corresponds to looking down onto the poles of the stars. An
inclination of 90° means that the orbital plane of the two stars lies directly in the
Earth observer's line of sight; thus eclipses of some kind are guaranteed. Figure
10.14 shows the semi-detached system AI Cru at several inclinations of varying
degrees.

209
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.14 – AI Cru viewed at different inclination angles

Orbital Phase and Normalization Phase

The orbital phase of a binary is simply a means of describing the positions of the
stars at any point within their orbit. The phase varies from 0.00 to 1.00, and is a
fraction of the period (P) of the binary. The deeper eclipse (primary eclipse = hotter
star eclipsed) is defined to be at phase 0.00P, and secondary eclipse (secondary
eclipse = cooler star eclipsed) for circular orbits is half way through the cycle or
0.50P. The quadrature phases (when both stars are most visible) are naturally in
between these two eclipse phases for circular orbits and are specified as 0.25P and
0.75P phase. These phase orientations are shown below in Figure 10.15.

Figure 10.15 – MR Cyg shown at four phase orientations

The Normalization Phase is the phase at which you wish to exactly pin your
synthetic light curve to your observed one. Any phase can be chosen, but usually
one of the quadratures (0.25P or 0.75P) is chosen. This is entirely up to the user.

Normalization Factor
The Normalization Factor is the actual value that you wish for your synthetic light
curve to have at the chosen Normalization Phase. Thus this parameter allows you to
match your theoretical light curve exactly to your observed one (at least at that one
phase). Usually when a light curve is prepared for analysis its magnitude values
(logarithmic scale) are converted into flux values (linear scale) and the highest value of
the flux (usually at one of the quadrature phases 0.25P or 0.75P) is defined to be unity
(1.00). As with the Normalization Phase, the value of the Normalization Factor is

210
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

entirely up to the user and depends on how the user set up their observed light curve
for analysis.

Phase Increment

Figure 10.16 – Observer pane in the User Input window

The Phase Increment establishes the phase interval at which the orbit is
calculated in the program. Therefore, a Phase Increment of 0.01 will produce an
orbit with flux points equally spaced at 0.01 intervals in phase, i.e., creating 100
points in the light curve. A Phase Increment of 0.005 will produce 200 flux
points and a value of 0.25 will produce 4 flux points. The orbit begins at the
Normalization Phase and increments by the value of the Phase Increment
from that point. To produce smooth PostScript graphics of the synthetic light
curve one should use a Phase Increment of at least 0.005.
As an example let's create synthetic curves of the detached system GZ CMa in the
V-bandpass with different phase increments. First setting the phase increment to
0.02 (which will create 50 synthetic flux points):

211
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.17 – GZ CMa V light curve and synthetic curve with phase increment
set at 0.02 (50 points)
Note the insufficient coverage within the eclipses (where most of the action is
taking place). Decreasing the phase increment to 0.01 (100 points) results in the
following:

Figure 10.18 – GZ CMa V light curve and synthetic curve with phase increment
set at 0.01 (100 points)
This is better eclipse coverage and plenty in the out of eclipse regions. Decreasing
the phase increment to 0.005 (200 points) yields the following:

212
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.19 – GZ CMa V light curve and synthetic curve with phase increment
set at 0.005 (200 points)
Now the eclipse coverage is almost adequate and the out of eclipse coverage is
much greater than needed. Finally let's decrease the phase increment to 0.001
(1000 points), which results in:

Figure 10.20 – GZ CMa V light curve and synthetic curve with phase increment
set at 0.001 (1000 points)
Now the eclipse coverage is excellent and the out of eclipse coverage is
ridiculous.

213
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Advanced Phase Increments

There is a way to avoid this dilemma of having too little coverage in the eclipses or
having too much out of eclipse. The button labeled Advanced next to the Phase
Increment input box allows the user to set up different segments of the light
curve to have different phase increments. Clicking on the Advanced button
brings up the following dialog:

Figure 10.21 – Advanced Phase Intervals dialog with the default values in place

The three-columned table allows the user to set the starting and ending phase and
the phase increment that the program is to use within that range. The default
values are shown above but they can be changed to whatever the user deems best.
Additional ranges can be added by clicking on the Add button and entering the
desired values. A range can be deleted by clicking on the line that contains the
values you wish to delete and then clicking on the Delete button. Let's change
the default values to numbers that will give more efficient coverage to the light
curve of GZ CMa, namely:

Figure 10.22 – Advanced Phase Intervals dialog with the values changed to
better suit GZ CMa

214
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

The Observer dialog changes to indicate that Advanced phase increments are
now in place as indicated within the Phase Increment input box shown below:

Figure 10.23 – Observer dialog showing that the Advanced Phase Increments
are in effect

The resulting synthetic light curve is shown below in a larger scale so that the
change in increments is clear:

215
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.24 – GZ CMa V light curves showing increased phase increments for
the out of eclipse portions

Note the larger density of synthetic points around the shoulders of the eclipses as
opposed to the number midway in between the eclipses. This Advanced Phase
Increment control can save time and also allow smoother drawing of PostScript
curves within the eclipse regions for output graphics.

To turn off the Advanced Phase Increments, click on the Advanced button
and uncheck the checkbox in the upper left hand corner of the Advanced Phase
Intervals dialog.

Spots
Wilson-Devinney notation (see the Wilson-Devinney program handbook) is used to
describe the spot parameters in the spherical and cylindrical coordinates mode of
Binary Maker 3. Note that the binary revolution is defined so that the angular
momentum vector is "up," i.e., the stars revolve (and rotate) counterclockwise as seen
from the pole visible to an observer on Earth. The specific parameters are as
follows:

216
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

colatitude = the angle from 0° to 180° measured along a meridian from the upper
pole to the lower pole

longitude = the angle from 0° to 360° measured counterclockwise from the

meridian along the line connecting the mass centers as seen from the upper
poles (positive end of the angular momentum vector); see Figure 10.25
below [Note that this is in the opposite direction to that defined in Binary
Maker 2.0. The original Wilson-Devinney spot notation (Kang & Wilson
1989) specified the clockwise direction, but was later switched to
counterclockwise to more logically follow the direction of positive angular
momentum.]

spot radius = the approximately circular radius in degrees of the spot region
centered at the colatitude and longitude described above (approximate
depending on the coarseness of the grid used to construct the binary)

spot temperature factor = the percentage hotter or cooler that the spot
temperature is relative to the local temperature, i.e., a spot temperature factor
of 0.60 means a spot which is 60% the temperature of its surrounding
photosphere, and a factor of 1.25 means a spot with a temperature 25%
hotter than its surroundings

star number = star 1 is the more massive star, star 2 is the less massive star

As an example, the diagram below shows fictitious spots on both components of RT

And.

217
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.25 – Sample spots on RT And

The spot coordinates and radii for the above diagram are:

Star Colatitude Longitude Spot Radius

1 40º 112º 21º
1 45º 237º 21º
2 40º 100º 15º

Overlapping Spots
If two spots overlap there can be some potential confusion as to what happens to
those area elements that coincide with the overlap. The program is set up to
check each surface area element to see whether or not it resides within a specified
spot region. It compares the surface area element's coordinates with those of the
first spot input by the user, then the second, then the third, and so on until it
either finds itself free from all of the spots or finds itself in a spot region. If it
resides within two or more spots simultaneously, then it always takes the
temperature factor of the first spot from the user's input that matches its
coordinates.

Umbras and Penumbras

Although this way of testing for spots presents some limitations, it also opens up
some interesting possibilities. For example, if you wanted to model a starspot

218
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

with an umbral and penumbral region (inner region cooler than the annulus, like
the Sun's spots) this can be easily accomplished. Specify two spots with identical
colatitudes and longitudes, but enter different spot radii and make the temperature
factor of the smaller, central spot cooler than the larger one. Make sure that the
first input spot is the smaller one (the center or umbral spot) and that the second
is the larger one (the penumbral spot). What will happen as the program runs is
that any surface area element within the central circle will take on the value of the
first input spot (here the darker one), and any surface area element in the
peripheral annulus will take on the temperature factor of the second input spot.
Although light curve asymmetries are not usually unambiguous enough for this
kind of detailed modeling, it's nice to know that the program can model umbras
and penumbras!

Longitude of Periastron
For eccentric orbits one needs several more parameters that are not needed for circular
orbits. The longitude of periastron ω is the angle measured from the ascending node
to the periastron point in the direction of revolution as shown in Figure 10.26.

219
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.26 – Binary Orbit showing the longitude of periastron ω; periastron is

labeled p

Eccentricity
The eccentricity of the orbit is defined as the distance from the center (C) of the ellipse
to the focal point (F) of ellipse (FC) divided by the length of the semimajor axis (a), i.e.,

FC
e≡
a

220
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.27 – Ellipse with eccentricity = 0.60

Thus the eccentricity will possess a value between zero (a circle) and 1.00 (a parabola).
Since the least energy configuration a binary system can possess is that of a circle, given
enough time, most eccentric orbit binaries decay into circular orbits due to tidal
frictional forces.

Zero Point of Phase

This parameter is a phase shift applied to the calculated phases in order to align the
synthetic light curve to the input observations. Usually this parameter is zero, but it
allows the program to take into account a possible zero point error in the ephemeris
used to construct the observed phases.

Rotation
Because of gravitational tidal forces, binary stars in circular orbits typically exhibit
synchronous rotation, i.e., their rotation and revolution periods are the same. The rotation
parameters (F1 and F2) represent the ratio of the angular velocity of rotation of the star
(ω1,2) to the mean angular velocity of revolution (ω) of the system, i.e.,

ω1, 2
F1, 2 ≡
ω
Thus a value of F = 1 for both stars in circular orbits corresponds to synchronous
rotation, the default setting of Binary Maker 3. If the binary has an eccentric orbit,
the idea of synchronism is muddied somewhat because of the continually varying
orbital velocities of both stars as they orbit each other. Hut (1981) demonstrated that

221
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

there is a condition reached in eccentric systems where the rotational angular velocity
of the stars is equal to the orbital angular velocity at periastron, a condition commonly
known as pseudo-synchronism. On the Rotation input pane within the User Input
dialog is a check box that toggles the pseudo-synchronism feature. Hut (1981) has
shown that the periastron-synchronized rotation value is given by the following
equation:

1+ e
F2 =
(1 − e )3
This equation is built into Binary Maker 3, and it is the default value for any binaries
whose parameters are input manually. Note for circular orbits (e = 0) that the rotation
parameter becomes unity. When an eccentricity is entered into the program, pseudo-
synchronous values of F are automatically calculated and placed into the Rotation
input boxes if the pseudo-synchronous box is checked (checked is the default
condition). To enter your own value into the input boxes, uncheck the pseudo-
synchronous box and the input boxes will be enabled.

To make a star rotate asynchronously, for example to make it rotate twice as fast as it
revolves, uncheck the pseudo-synchronous box and make the star’s F value equal to
2.

Disk
The Disk feature was added to the program in order to address as a first
approximation binary systems that possess accretion disks. Essentially this feature
allows the user to simulate a disk by chopping off latitude segments of one of the stars.
Bright and dark regions can also be placed on the disk (starspot feature) and the disk
does not eclipse the companion star. Although this is certainly not an optimal disk
model, it was felt that it was better than nothing.

As an example, the modeling of the classical nova V1494 Aql is discussed below.

222
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.28 - Disk Mode tabbed pane in the User Input window
The check box next to the words Enable Disk set whether or not the Disk
Mode is in effect. The Latitude Cutoff input box refers to the last latitude "row"
that is to be left visible of the "star" which has been designated as the disk in Star
Number. To demonstrate how this mode works we will apply it to V1494 Aql, a
recent classical nova. The peculiar light curve (unfiltered) is shown below:

Figure 10.29 - Classical nova remnant V1494 Aql unfiltered light curve
The light curve shows a significant eclipse that is actually the occultation of a hot
region on the accretion disk that surrounds a white dwarf. The model selected

223
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

(with no radial velocity data available and therefore no reliable mass ratio)
appeared as follows before the Disk Mode was implemented:

Figure 10.30 - V1494 Aql model before enabling Disk Mode

Note that the grid size is 20 x 40, i.e., 20 latitude segments above and below the
equator of the stars. To make the thinnest disk possible, the Latitude Cutoff was
set at 20 (see topmost figure) that allowed only the latitude segment above and
below the equator, i.e.,

Figure 10.31 - V1494 Aql model after enabling Disk Mode

224
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Three hot spots were placed along the disk and the following synthetic model was
constructed, seen plotted below against the observed unfiltered light curve:

Figure 10.32 - V1494 Aql synthetic disk model (blue squares) plotted against the
unfiltered light curve (red crosshairs)
The strange "bend" near phase 0.860P was modeled as the place where the star
blocks the hottest region on the disk. The figure below shows the model at
0.845P with the hot region about to be blocked by the other star.

225
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.33 - V1494 Aql disk model with hottest region indicated and about to be
eclipsed

Radial Velocity

Figure 10.34 - Radial Velocity window for 44 i Boo

226
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

The Radial Velocity Plot window displays the observed radial velocity curves for
both stars in the binary system, as well as the theoretically generated mass-centered
and light-centered radial velocity curves. These various curves will be explained on
this page, and the myriad of features which allow the user to control the display of
the window are described in detail in Chapter 8 as well as under the Radial
Velocity Plot window Help pages.
Radial velocity curves map out the velocity of each star as seen from Earth as
measured from spectra that exhibit the periodic Doppler-shifting of spectral lines.
As each star orbits the barycenter (center of mass) of the system, one star will be
going away from the observer while the other star will be coming towards the
observer. An approach of a star causes its spectral features to exhibit shorter
wavelengths (blue-shift) than if it were at rest, and longer wavelengths (red-shift)
when the star is receding. On a plot of these velocities, the convention is that red
shifts (receding velocities) are plotted as positive quantities because the distance
between the observer and the star is increasing (getting larger positively). Blue
shifts are seen to be negative velocities because the star is approaching the
observer and the distance between them is decreasing.
As stars orbit their common barycenter, they must always be exactly opposite each
other, i.e., you can always connect the mass centers of the two stars with a straight
line that will also pass through the barycenter. Also, as shown in the diagram
below, the distance from the more massive star to the barycenter compared to the
distance from the less mass star to the barycenter is proportional to their masses,
i.e.,

Figure 10.35 - Mass Balance diagram for circular orbits: CM marks the barycenter
(center of mass)

227
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

The mass balance equation says that m1r1 = m2r2. Note also that each star must
complete its respective orbit in exactly the same amount of time (the period of
the system). This necessitates that the less massive star, which has the larger orbit,
must be traveling at a greater speed than the more massive star in order to
complete its large orbit in the same time as the massive star completes its smaller
orbit. For circular orbits, the time it takes to complete the orbit (the period) will
be

2πr1 2πr2
P= =
v1 v2

This becomes

r1 r2 r v
= ⇒ 1 = 1
v1 v2 r2 v2

From the mass balance equation we have that

r1 m2
=
r2 m1

So that finally we see that the ratio of the velocities of the two stars is inversely
proportional to the mass ratio of the stars, i.e.,

r1 v1 m2
= =
r2 v2 m1

Therefore if we can measure the velocities of the two stars, then the ratio of their
velocities tells us the ratio of the masses, an extremely important value to ascertain
in the study of binary stars.
Let’s return to the radial velocity curves. If we consider the stars to be point
masses, their radial velocity curves will be sinusoids (for circular orbits). The
theoretical radial velocity curves generated with the assumption of the stars being
point masses are called the mass centers radial velocity curves. The mass
centers approximation assumes that the center of the star's mass coincides with
the center of the star's light output (the light center), i.e., that if you average the
light output of the star over its entire surface it would be equal to that of a point
source located at the mass center. This is valid if the stars are spherical, but it is
not true if the stars are non-spherical.
In the Radial Velocity Plot the mass centers curves for each star are plotted as
red crosshairs, as shown below in Figure 10.36 for the detached binary GZ CMa:

228
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.36 - Radial Velocity Plot for GZ CMa showing the mass centers
theoretical curves (red crosshairs); the blue crosshairs are the primary stars radial
velocity data points, the green crosshairs those of the secondary star
As can be seen in the above plot for GZ CMa, the mass centers curves fit the
observations extremely well. This is because GZ CMa is a detached system with
two nearly spherical and nearly identical stars, so the mass centers approximation
to reality is very adequate.
With spherical stars the center of light coincides with the mass center of the stars
(e.g., GZ CMa), but with non-spherical stars (overcontact binaries in the extreme)
the light centers are closer to the barycenter of the system. When the light centers
radial velocity curves for GZ CMa are added to the graph (black crosshairs for the
secondary star and black squares for the primary), it can be seen that they are
nearly identical to the red mass centers curves, as shown below in Figure 10.37:

229
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.37 - GZ CMa radial velocity curves with light centers points added
(black squares for primary star, black crosshairs for secondary)
Although very close to the mass centers curves, the light centers curves are not
exactly the same. They deviate slightly in the quadrature phases (0.25P and 0.75P)
and especially around the eclipses (phases 0.00P and 0.50P). Note the strange
bump in the primary's light center curve near 0.00P and a similar strange bump in
the secondary's curve around 0.50P. This bump is known as the Rossiter effect and
will be explained below.
The mass centers approximation does not take into account the fact that the
stars can be ellipsoidal nor does it take into account eclipse effects that show up
because the stars are rotating about their respective axes as well as revolving about
the barycenter. Let's first address the non-spherical issue. When a star is large
relative to its inner Lagrangian surface, it becomes ellipsoidal in shape due to tidal
forces between the two stars. What this does to the star's light output is to shift
its light center towards the barycenter because of the star's strange shape.
Consider the diagram below which shows the mass centers and light centers for
the overcontact binary AB And:

230
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.38 - AB And showing the barycenter and the difference between mass
and light centers
The light centers will naturally have smaller radial velocities because they are
closer to the barycenter, and therefore the amplitudes of the observed radial
velocity curves will be slightly less than those predicted by the mass centers
theoretical radial velocity curves. This can be seen in the comparison of AB And's
observed versus light centered and mass centered radial velocity curves plotted
below in Figure 10.39:

231
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.39 - Observed and theoretical radial velocity curves of AB And: blue
crosshairs are the primary observed data, blue squares the theoretical light
centers curves; green crosshairs are the secondary observed data green squares
the theoretical light centers curves. The red crosshairs are the primary's
theoretical mass centers radial velocity curve, the red squares the secondary's
theoretical mass centers curves.
Although a very busy diagram, the above plot demonstrates that the light centers
theoretical curves (blue and green squares) fit the data and they are smaller in
amplitude than the mass centered curves (the red crosshairs and red squares).
Also note the strange divergences near the eclipses (phases 0.00P and 0.50P) first
noticed in the plot of GZ CMa's radial velocity data. What is causing this strange
perturbation from the mass centered curves? This is caused by the fact that at the
eclipses one of the stars is being hidden as its companion crosses in front of it. It
is the way in which the star is being hidden that is causing an increase in apparent
radial velocity known as the Rossiter effect. Let's look at what's happening in
more detail.
Consider the views of AB And at phases 0.47P and 0.53P shown below:

232
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.40 – AB And shown at the beginning and ending of secondary eclipse to
illustrate the cause of the Rossiter effect in the radial velocity curve of the primary
star
Remember that the stars are revolving and rotating simultaneously. If a star is
rotating and its disk is entirely visible (like the smaller star in front in the figure
above for AB And), one edge (here the "left" edge) is "approaching" us and the
other (right side) is receding. The light coming from the approaching side will be
blueshifted (wavelength shortened) and the light coming from the receding side
will be redshifted (wavelength lengthened). If both sides are visible, these
Doppler shifts are essentially equal and merely broaden the spectral features. But,
if one of the stars is eclipsed, then the light from the side that is eclipsed will not
be seen, leaving an unequal amount of Doppler shifted light coming from the
unblocked side of the star. So, returning to AB And at phase 0.47P, the smaller
star is blocking the approaching side of the larger star which would have emitted
blueshifted light because of its rotation. However the receding limb of the larger
star is still mostly visible so its redshifted light will still be contributing to the
spectral features. Therefore the lines of the more massive star will be
preferentially increased in redshift (velocity of recession) as is seen near phase
0.47P in the above radial velocity plot and the zoomed in version of this plot
(Figure 10.41) centered near the secondary eclipse.

233
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.41 - Close up view of the radial velocity curves of AB And showing the
Rossiter Effect around secondary eclipse 0.50P
Similarly, after secondary eclipse (phase 0.50P), the approaching limb of the larger
star is being revealed while the receding limb is being covered up. This reverses
the process so that now the spectral features of the more massive star will be
preferentially blueshifted because of the approaching limb, and this is exactly why
the radial velocity points are more negative. The same phenomenon occurs with
the less massive star at the primary eclipse (0.00P).
In the absence of velocity semiamplitudes and a systemic velocity, only
dimensionless synthetic radial velocity curves ("normalized" radial velocity curves)
can be drawn which contain the factor P/(2 π a), where P is the period of the
binary and a is the semimajor axis. A typical synthetic radial velocity plot might
look like the following:

234
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.42 - Normalized radial velocity curve for the overcontact system AE
Phe which had no observed radial velocity data as of 2004
Note that the scale goes from -1 to +1 with the systemic velocity set at zero. To
convert normalized radial velocities into actual velocities you would need to know
the velocity semiamplitudes K1 and K2 as well as the systemic velocity Vo. The
conversion equation is:
radial velocity (km/s) = (normalized radial velocity)(K1 + K2) + Vo

Figure 10.43 - RV pane in the User Input window with parameters of EE Peg

235
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

The period of the binary is simply the time (in days) that it takes for the stars to
complete one orbit. This parameter is needed in order to determine the masses of the
stars via Newton's formulation of Kepler's Third Law.

The velocity semiamplitudes (as astronomers call them; they're really the
amplitudes of the radial velocity curves) allow the mass ratio to be determined.

Figure 10.44 - Radial Velocity data of EE Peg showing the velocity

semiamplitudes K1 (more massive star) and K2 (less massive star)
Historically designated K1 and K2, their ratio is the inverse mass ratio of the
system, i.e.,

M 2 K1
=
M1 K2

(This relationship was derived above.) In the case of EE Peg K1 = 89.4 km/s and
K2 = 144.4 km/s yielding a spectroscopic mass ratio of 0.619. The velocity
semiamplitudes are measured relative to systemic velocity (velocity of the
barycenter of the binary as it flies through space relative to the Sun), indicated in
Figures 10.44 and 10.45 as the dashed line.
The systemic velocity of a binary is the velocity of the barycenter of the system as
it flies through space relative to the Sun. It is indicated below as the dashed line
exactly splitting the radial velocity data.

236
C H A P T E R 1 0 - B I N A R Y M A K E R 3 P A R A M E T E R S E X P L A I N E D

Figure 10.45 - Radial Velocity data of EE Peg with systemic velocity indicated

237
 11
Chapter
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

Light Curve Analysis

The fundamentals of light curve analysis are explained and
illustrated.

T
his chapter is devoted to defining and explaining the many input parameters
needed to construct meaningful binary models. Hopefully this chapter will
help to clarify misconceptions and mysteries related to the field of binary star
research and analysis.

So, how does one go about solving or analyzing an eclipsing binary light curve? The
first step is to become familiar with the fundamental types of eclipsing binaries that
exist, and recognizing the general morphology that each of their light curves exhibits.
The overall classification of eclipsing binary systems is founded upon Roche
equipotentials. The shapes of the two stars will be mandated by their mass ratios,
rotation rates and their separations. The different shapes that are possible for a mass
ratio of 0.40 (synchronous rotation, circular orbit) were shown in Figure 10.6 in
Chapter 10, where the configuration (shapes of the stars’ surfaces) depends upon how
close the stars reside to their inner Lagrangian surface. There are basically six kinds of
eclipsing binary systems:

1. detached

2. semi-detached

3. near contact

4. contact

5. overcontact

6. double contact

Detached Systems

238
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

Detached systems occur when both stars are located well within their respective inner
Lagrangian surface and therefore take on essentially spherical shapes, as shown below
for KP Aql in Figure 11.1.

Figure 11.1 – Inner and Outer Lagrangian surfaces for the detached binary KP Aql

Semi-Detached Systems
In larger mass binaries, the star with the larger mass will evolve more rapidly than its
lower mass companion, and as it expands and fills its inner Lagrangian surface it will
spill mass onto its companion. As the mass transfers over to the less massive star, the
mass ratio changes (increases) in such a way that the inner Lagrangian surface for the
more massive component decreases in size, accelerating the mass transfer over to the
less massive star. Eventually the more massive component becomes the less massive
component and we are left with a star that has filled its inner Lagrangian surface
through stellar evolution but is now the less mass component. The now more massive
component is the less evolved star, and this apparent mystery has been dubbed the
Algol Paradox. AD Her is a typical Algol system (or semi-detached system) and is
shown in Figure 11.2 below:

239
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

Figure 11.2 – Inner and Outer Lagrangian surfaces for the semi-detached binary AD
Her

Near Contact Systems

Near contact binaries are a bit more loosely defined. Strictly speaking these are just
more extreme examples of semi-detached systems where one component is in contact
with its inner Lagrangian surface and the other is nearly in contact. The accepted
paradigm for these systems is that they are approaching the contact stage, where both
stars fill their inner Lagrangian surfaces. V1010 Oph, a typical near contact system, is
shown in Figure 11.3 below.

Figure 11.3 – Inner and Outer Lagrangian surfaces for the near contact binary V1010
Oph

240
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

Contact Systems
Contact binaries are those systems wherein both stars exactly fill their inner Lagrangian
surfaces. It is believed that these systems are in the stage between near contact and
overcontact, and some theories believe that they will oscillate between these two
configurations until they finally become overcontact systems, possibly on their way to
finally coalescing into a single star. A typical contact system, BX And, is shown below
in Figure 11.4.

Figure 11.4 – Inner and Outer Lagrangian surfaces for the contact binary BX And

Overcontact Systems
Overcontact binaries are those systems wherein both stars overflow their inner
Lagrangian surfaces. The stars are nearly at the same temperature, usually within a few
hundred degrees Kelvin, the smaller star stealing energy from its more massive
companion. A typical overcontact binary, AE Phe, is shown below in Figure 11.5.

241
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

Figure 11.5 – Inner and Outer Lagrangian surfaces for the overcontact binary AE Phe

Double Contact Systems

Double contact binaries consist of stars where both systems exactly fill their inner
Lagrangian surfaces but one or both of the components are rotating faster than
synchronously with their revolutionary period. These systems appear to be relatively
rare, but they do exist. The best-known example of these interesting binaries, RZ Sct,
is shown below in Figure 11.6.

Figure 11.6 – Inner Lagrangian surfaces for the overcontact binary RZ Sct

Recognizing the Light Curves of the Different Binary Types

If you become familiar with the different shapes of eclipsing binary light curves, you
will usually be able to quickly hone in on a reasonable solution using Binary Maker 3.
The key is in understanding why different types of binaries exhibit different shaped
light curves, as well as understanding exactly what each light curve parameter does in
the creating of a synthetic light curve. We will begin with showing sample light curves
of the various binary types listed above and explaining why the light curves appear as

242
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

they do. We will also limit our discussion in this section to circular orbit systems,
placing the description of eccentric orbit system analysis at the end of the chapter.

Typical detached binaries consist of relatively spherical stars, and hence as they revolve
about each other the light level remains fairly constant and so the out of eclipse light
variation will be quite small. Let us look at the b (Strömgren blue) light curve of GZ
CMa from Andersen et al. (1985), shown below in Figure 11.7:

Figure 11.7 – b (Strömgren blue) light curve of GZ CMa from Andersen et al. (1985)

The out of eclipse light level is indeed mostly constant, and the eclipses are well-
defined and sharp, indicating that the stars eclipse each other partially or that the stars
are the same size and shape (spheres). The difference in depths is mostly due to the
fact that the stars must possess different surface temperatures. This makes sense
because, for circular orbit systems, the amount of surface area eclipsed at both eclipses
must be the same. Therefore, since the same area of star’s surface is blocked at the
eclipses, the difference in light loss must be primarily due to a difference in surface
temperature. In other words, when the hotter component is eclipsed, you will lose
more light than when the cooler component is eclipsed. So, in the case of GZ CMa,
the deeper eclipse is caused when the cooler star blocks the hotter star. The width of
the eclipses is a function of the sizes of the stars as well as their orbital inclination. The
greater the inclination the wider and deeper the eclipses will be.

To begin the analysis of a light curve, one needs as much information about the binary
as possible. Especially useful is a color index or spectroscopic classification because
either will allow an approximate temperature designation for the stars. Once an

243
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

approximate temperature has been established, limb darkening coefficients can also be
determined from the appropriate tables for the effective wavelength of the
observations. Prior to 1993 the tables published by Al-Naimy (1979) were widely used
and they are included in the Appendix. Van Hamme (1993) published completely
revised modern limb darkening coefficients based upon Kurucz (1989) model
atmospheres. A portion of these tables is included in Appendix through the kind
permission of Dr. Van Hamme.

Perhaps the most elusive parameter is the mass ratio. For partially eclipsing systems
the direct determination of this parameter is quite problematic because many different
mass ratios can be used with various other parameters to mimic the observed light
curves. A spectroscopic mass ratio is needed in order to pin down the mass ratio of
partially eclipsing systems, as well as to allow the direct calculation of the absolute
parameters of the binary (masses, radii, etc.). If you do not have a spectroscopically
determined mass ratio but the system exhibits a total eclipse, then it is possible to
determine a fairly reliable mass ratio because of the restrictions inherent in a total
eclipse (i.e., the length of totality puts severe constraints on the relative sizes of the
stars).

If the binary has no radial velocity curve and is partially eclipsing, then the best one can
do is to make a series of models with a range of mass ratios (q) and plot the residuals
for each fit versus the mass ratio used for that particular fit. This technique, sometimes
called the “q-method,” is certainly not guaranteed to determine the true mass ratio, but
it is the best that can be done in the absence of more information. Certainly for
detached systems like GZ CMa the mass ratio cannot be too far from unity since the
stars are spherical and about the same temperature with fairly deep eclipses.
Fortunately GZ CMa has an excellent radial velocity curve (Popper et al. (1985)) and a
well-determined spectroscopic mass ratio of 0.909. Armed with this and color indices
indicating surface temperatures close to 8500 º K, one can quickly converge to an
excellent model for this system by trying different radii and inclinations until the light
curve is closely approximated. The solution given by Popper et al. (1985) is shown
below in Figure 11.8.

244
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

Figure 11.8 – Solid curve represents the solution given by Popper et al (1985) for the b-
light curve of GZ CMa

The final parameters themselves can be found in the Zip folder of Binary Maker 3 as
well as on the Catalog and Atlas of Eclipsing Binaries (CALEB) at
[Link] The relative sizes of the stars and their inner and outer
critical Lagrangian surfaces are shown below in Figure 11.9. Note that the stars are
well within their inner Lagrangian surface and therefore they are nearly spherical, hence
the lack of out of eclipse light variation.

Figure 11.9 - Components of GZ CMa relative to each other and their inner and outer
critical Lagrangian surfaces. The plus sign between them is the barycenter.

245
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

Let us explore another detached binary, EE Peg, as shown below in Figure 11.10 from
Ebbighausen (1971). This system is not only obviously detached (as evidenced by its
relatively flat out of eclipse light curve) but its components possess very different
surface temperatures as seen from the large difference in eclipse depths. The
secondary eclipse is also total, which again greatly constrains the model.

Figure 11.10 – B light curve and solution (solid curve) of EE Peg from Ebbighausen
(1971)

These stars are also mostly spherical, but not as much as GZ CMa, and the out of
eclipse light variation is more evident than in the light curve of GZ CMa. The stars of
EE Peg are shown below in Figure 11.11 with respect to their Lagrangian critical
surfaces. Note that the larger, more massive and hotter star is slightly more ellipsoidal
than the larger component of GZ CMa and causes most of the out of eclipse light
variation seen in the light curve.

246
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

Figure 11.11 – Components of EE Peg relative to each other and their inner and outer
critical Lagrangian surfaces. The plus sign between them is the barycenter.

If the stars are closer together and/or their surfaces are in close proximity to the inner
Lagrangian surface, their shapes will begin to distort roughly into ellipsoids because of
gravitational tidal forces. Thus, because the stars are “football” shaped, their light
curves will vary continually even when not eclipsing because their visible cross-
sectional areas will be continually changing. We expect the out of eclipse portions of
the light curve to not be flat but varying in flux, as seen in the close binary system NN
Cep whose light curve is shown in Figure 11.12 below.

Figure 11.12 – V light curve of NN Cep with synthetic model shown as solid curve

247
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

The model of NN Cep is shown below in Figure 11.13 where the larger component is
fairly close to its inner critical surface and the smaller component is also close and
therefore both stars are distorted from spheres and create varying light levels even out
of eclipse.

Figure 11.13 – Critical Surfaces and model of NN Cep: both stars are relatively close to
their inner critical surfaces, resulting in non-spherical stars

Another system where both stars are very close to their inner critical surfaces is AI Cru,
whose light curve is shown below in Figure 11.14 and the model of the system itself is
shown in Figure 11.15.

Figure 11.14 – y light curve of AI Cru

248
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

Figure 11.15 – Critical Lagrangian surfaces and model of AI Cru

Note that the light curve of AI Cru is reminiscent of NN Cep except that the eclipse
depths are more dissimilar in AI Cru and the widths of the eclipses are wider. Thus the
stars of AI Cru must be both fairly different in temperature (different eclipse depths) as
well as much larger stars relative to each other (to explain the longer eclipse durations).

What will happen if one of the stars reaches its inner Lagrangian critical surface before
its companion (as usually happens)? The star that reaches its inner Lagrangian critical
surface first is the more massive star and gas from it will be dumped onto its
companion beginning a mass transfer that will typically lead to an Algol system. The
less massive star (originally the more massive star) is in contact with its inner critical
surface and the now more massive component is usually a main sequence star, most
often well within its inner critical surface. The binary is designated as a semi-
detached system. This strange situation, where the more massive star of the system is
the less evolved component, is known as the Algol Paradox. A typical Algol system,
AS Eri, is shown below in Figure 11.16 and its critical surfaces and model are given in
Figure 11.17.

249
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

Figure 11.16 – Light curve and synthetic model (solid curve) of AS Eri

Figure 11.17 – Critical Lagrangian surfaces and model of AS Eri

The large difference in eclipse depths, typical of Algol systems, belies the very large
difference in surface temperatures between the main sequence massive star and the
much cooler evolved star that is in contact with its inner critical surface.

250
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

When one star is in contact with its inner critical surface and its companion is nearly in
contact with its critical surface, the binary has been described as a near contact system.
The light curve changes in magnitude throughout the orbit but the stars are usually
quite different in temperature, as can be seen in the near contact system AK CMi
shown below in Figures 11.18 and 11.19.

Figure 11.18 – V light curve of AK CMi

Figure 11.19 – Critical Lagrangian surfaces and model of AK CMi

The next possibility is the contact system, when two stars both exactly fill their inner
Lagrangian surfaces. The stars typically possess considerably different temperatures,

251
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

and of course because they are very much distorted from spheres, the light levels vary
throughout the entire orbit. It is often difficult to distinguish between a near contact
system and a contact system, and careful light curve analysis must be used to discern
which type the binary is. Usually the temperatures of the stars are not quite as
disparate as in a near contact system, probably because the stars are in a stage where
the smaller star is beginning to steal energy from the hotter, more massive component
as they come into contact. A good example of a contact system is BX And, shown
below in Figure 11.20 and its model is given in Figure 11.21.

Figure 11.20 – V light curve of BX And

Figure 11.21 – Critical Lagrangian surfaces and model of BX And

252
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

A careful comparison of the light curves of AK CMi (near contact) and BX And will
reveal more similarities than differences, the main difference being the greater depth of
the secondary eclipse demonstrating that the secondary (less massive, smaller, cooler)
star is more nearly the same temperature as the primary (more massive, larger, hotter)
star.

It is believed that the stage after contact systems is the overcontact binary. These stars
have been in contact for a long enough period of time such that their surfaces have
come into an approximate thermal equilibrium and their surfaces have extended
beyond their inner critical surfaces. This results in light curves that are continually
changing in the flux level and the eclipse depths are nearly equal because of the nearly
equal surface temperatures. Shown below in Figure 11.22 is a typical overcontact
binary (fillout = 0.14), AD Cnc (Samec 1989), which demonstrates the characteristics
of this type of light curve.

Figure 11.22 – V light curve of AD Cnc (Samec 1989) which has a fillout = 0.14. The
system at phase 0.25P is shown below the light curve.

If the shoulders of the eclipses are steeper than AD Cnc, then this is an indication that
more light is being cut off more quickly, and this often means that the stars are even
more extended beyond their inner critical surfaces, i.e., their fillout is larger than the
average value of 0.15 for most overcontact systems (Robertson and Eggleton 1977).
This is shown in Figure 11.23 for AW Lac, an overcontact system with a large fillout =
0.60.

253
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

Figure 11.23 – V light curve of AW Lac (Jiang 1983) which has a fillout = 0.60. The
system at phase 0.25P is shown below the light curve.

Figure 11.24 shows synthetic light curves for a typical overcontact binary (SS Ari) but
for six different values of fillout. The top curve represents a fillout = 0.00
demonstrating broad shoulders and the slowest drop-off in light level. Each successive
curve represents an increase in fillout of 0.20 (i.e., 0.20, 0.40, 0.60, 0.80 and 1.00) up to
the maximum allowed of f = 1.00. It is easily seen that as the stars increase in size they
block off more light and at an accelerated pace as evidenced by the steep eclipse
shoulders as the fillout increases. No other binary parameters were changed other than
the value of the fillout; the inclination was not changed.

254
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

Figure 11.24 – The effect of varying the value of fillout on the shape of an overcontact
binary light curve. The top curve shows the system with a fillout = 0.00, and each
successive curve has a larger fillout by increments of 0.20 (i.e., 0.20, 0.40, 0.60, 0.80 and
1.00).

Light Curve Analysis “Tips”

An excellent way to get a "feeling" for what kind of parameters will create what
kinds of light curves is to explore the Catalog and Atlas of Eclipsing Binaries
at [Link] You can list the hundreds of on-line binaries by binary
type and look at the light curves and perhaps find one that is similar to your own.
Many of the systems listed in this database are also included in the Zip library
accompanying Binary Maker 3. Additional systems can be downloaded directly
from the site.
Once you have determined the basic type of binary from the shape of the light
curve, there are several straightforward techniques that can be used to hone in on
a possible solution.
If the light curve appears to be an overcontact system (i.e., relatively short period
(less than 1 day), light variation throughout the light curve and similar depth
eclipses) then put the program into fillout mode. If color indices exist then an
approximate effective temperature can be set for both stars, i.e., initially set both
stars to the same temperature. If the period is less than 0.4 days, then the system
will likely be a W-type overcontact system where the larger star is the cooler star.

255
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

This requires a mass ratio input that is greater than unity. Obviously use a
spectroscopic mass ratio if that is available. If the system displays a total eclipse
then the mass ratio can be determined through trial and error modeling of
different mass ratios until the eclipses are properly fitted. If the system is partially
eclipsing than a series of solutions with different mass ratios will have to be
attempted, and the best-fit parameters will be the best estimate of the actual ones.
Once a mass ratio has been input, a good starting point for both fillouts is 0.15,
the average value found for overcontact systems (Robertson and Eggleton 1977).
Start with an orbital inclination of 85 degrees unless the system exhibits total
eclipses. If it displays total eclipses then begin with 90 degrees. If the estimated
temperatures are less than 7200 K, then treat the stars as convective and let the
gravity brightening coefficients be 0.32. If the stars are believed to be higher in
temperature than 7200 K (mostly radiative stars), then set the gravity brightening
coefficients be 1.00. Linear limb darkening coefficients can be determined from
Van Hamme's (1993) tables that are available in the program Help files as well as
in the Appendix of the User Manual. The reflection coefficients will be 0.5 for
convective stars and 1.0 for radiative stars. If there is extraneous light in the data
then that will have to be compensated for by entering a value for Third Light. Be
certain that the effective wavelength entered corresponds to the effective
wavelength of the filter through which the data were observed.
Assuming that the light curve has been read into the Light Curve Plot and that
you have generated a theoretical (synthetic) model, compare the theoretical light
curve to the observations. If the theoretical eclipses are both too deep, then
decrease the inclination until the depths are more comparable to the observations.
If one eclipse seems the correct depth but the other is not, then the temperature
of one of the stars must be changed (usually the smaller star is changed). Light
curve analysis does not give the absolute temperatures of stars but rather the
temperature difference between the two stars. Therefore changing the
temperature of just one of the stars is sufficient. If the eclipse that doesn't fit is
too low then the star being eclipsed is too high in temperature. If the theoretical
eclipse isn't low enough, then that star is too cool. Note that adjusting the
temperature of one star will affect the relative depths of both eclipses. When both
eclipses are too low or two high from the observations by approximately the
same amount, then simply adjust the inclination at that point to make both the
eclipses fit.
Once a solution for a particular wavelength has been achieved, save it as a BM3
file and then load in another bandpass dataset and change the wavelength and
limb darkening coefficients to match that wavelength (also third light if it is
nonzero). If your first model is a good one, then the other wavelength-
independent parameters should fit the other dataset as well. If it does not, then
adjustments will have to be made in the model (temperatures, sizes, mass ratio,
etc.) until a coherent model satisfactorily fits all of the light curves with only the

256
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

wavelength-dependent parameters (wavelength, limb darkening and third light)

being different for each filter.
If the light curves vary in brightness throughout the cycle but the eclipse depths
are quite different, then you probably have a contact or near contact system. You
can again use fillout mode, setting one star's fillout to zero (0.0) and the other to a
slightly less than zero value, say -0.10. Experiment with different mass ratios and
different temperatures until a satisfactory fit is obtained.
If the light curve appears to be an Algol system (semi-detached with the less
massive star being more evolved than the more massive star and very disparate
eclipse depths), then you should probably set the program to Radii input mode.
The cooler star will be at its Roche limit so set its radius to -1 (the flag that forces
the star to exactly fill its inner Lagrangian surface). Estimate the mass ratio and
radius of the primary star and experiment until your synthetic light curve matches
your observed one.
For detached systems, again use Radii input mode and experiment with different
sizes, temperatures and inclinations until you achieve success in matching your
data.

Asynchronous Systems
Because of tidal friction between the two stars in the binary, their rotation periods
are usually identical to their revolution periods. This condition is call synchronous
rotation, and the best-known example of this situation occurs between the Earth
and Moon with the same face of the Moon always facing Earth because of this
synchronism. The majority of observed binary systems appear to have come into
synchronous rotation, and this condition is parameterized by the rotation
parameters F1 and F2. When they are both equal to unity, this means that the stars
are in synchronous rotation, i.e., that their revolution and rotation angular
velocities are equal. Asynchronous rotation can be modeled in Binary Maker 3
by setting these rotation parameters to values other than 1.00, usually values
greater than 1.00, signifying that the stars are rotating faster than synchronously.
It will be rare to run into binaries with asynchronous rotation, but there are several
examples of such systems included in the Zip library, e.g., RZ Cas, LZ Cen, SW
Cyg, RW Mon, and RZ Sct.

Eccentric Systems
Eccentric orbit binaries are more complicated than circular orbit systems because
there are two more parameters that need to be specified, namely the eccentricity
(e) and the longitude of periastron (ω). The eccentricity parameterizes the
shape of the orbit (how much it differs from a circle) and the longitude of
periastron is the angle in degrees (measured in the direction of revolution) from

257
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

the ascending node to the periastron point (see Figure 10.26). This parameter,
along with the eccentricity, will determine where the secondary eclipse will occur
in the light curve. It will usually not be exactly halfway in phase (i.e., at 0.50P) as it
always is with circular orbit binaries. For eccentric systems it will depend on both
the eccentricity and the longitude of periastron. And to make matters more
complicated, the longitude of periastron changes with time (precesses) and
therefore will be different at different epochs. Let us look at an eccentric system
to get a feel for what an eccentric orbit light curve looks like and how it would
change in appearance as its longitude of periastron changes. There are many
examples of eccentric systems included in the Zip library. We will look at V1647
Sgr and the observations and analysis of Clausen et al. (1977) and Andersen &
Gimenez (1985). The diagram below shows the b light curve of V1647 Sgr and
next to each light curve is the orbital position of the stars at the phase of
secondary eclipse for the longitude of periastron noted for each curve.

258
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

Figure 11.25 - The light curve of V1647 Sgr at four different longitudes of periastron.
Each orbital diagram is shown at the phase of secondary eclipse looking down onto
the plane of the orbits. The direction to Earth is straight down towards the bottom of
the page.

259
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

(Note that the zero point of phase was adjusted in each of the above light curves
in Figure 11.25 to place the primary eclipse at phase 0.00P).
In the diagram above, the orbits of the stars about their common barycenter
correspond with the light curve on their left. The top configuration, where ω =
203.8 degrees, is the actual observed longitude of periastron, as can be seen by the
fit to the data in the light curve (red crosshairs). The orbital aspect is seen from
the top (inclination = 0 degrees) centered on the barycenter, and the direction to
Earth is straight down the page. Thus the aspect plotted is always the phase of
secondary eclipse (i.e., the star at the "bottom" of the orbital diagram is always the
larger, hotter star). As the longitude of periastron changes (note that each change
from orbit to orbit is 90 degrees from the previous one) the light curves change
drastically. The eclipse widths are not equal and change with the longitude of
periastron.
This can be understood if one compares, for example, the light curve second from
the top (ω = 293.8 degrees) to the light curve at the bottom (ω = 113.8 degrees).
Besides the obvious displacement of the secondary eclipses, their widths are also
significantly different from each other. This large difference occurs because of
where the eclipses occur relative to where the stars are in their orbits. In the
second light curve, secondary eclipse occurs near phase 0.618P, when the stars are
near periastron, i.e., when they are moving the fastest in their orbits. Therefore
the width of the eclipse is narrow because the stars are moving fastest during this
eclipse. Conversely, the primary eclipse is wide because they are moving slowest
near phase 0.00P, i.e., when the stars are near apastron. In the bottom light curve,
the situation is essentially reversed, and secondary eclipse, which occurs near
phase 0.385P, is wider than primary eclipse because the stars are near apastron at
secondary eclipse (as can be seen in the orbital diagram for ω = 113.8 degrees) and
are traveling relatively slowly.
Note also the small "bump" in the top light curve near phase 0.16P. This "bump,"
which appears in both the data and the theoretical curve, occurs because the stars
are near periastron at this phase and are tidally stretched out and at this phase they
are seen in their "longest" cross-section and hence they give off more light. This
can be seen in the orbital diagram below which displays phase 0.16P for the actual
observed ω = 203.8 degrees.

260
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

Figure 11.26 - Phase 0.160P of V1647 Sgr where the maximum surface areas of
the stars are displayed creating the "bump" near phase 0.160P.
Note that the stars are close to periastron (closest approach to each other) and
therefore the tidal forces will be near a maximum, resulting in a large "stretching"
of the two stars which are seen in cross-section at this phase. This creates the
"bump" seen near phase 0.16P in the light curve shown in the previous diagram.
The "bump" does not occur exactly at periastron (phase 0.183P) because the
elongated axes of the stars will not be as much in cross-section at that phase
(perpendicular to our line of sight) as they were at phase 0.160P.
As proof that the stars will be most elongated at periastron, consider the plot of
the theoretical light curve of V1647 Sgr for 0º inclination. Note that the bump in
the synthetic light curve (the blue curve) occurs at the periastron phase (0.183P).
The entire light variation seen here is due to the changing shapes of the stars in
their eccentric orbits since the inclination in this plot is 0º.

261
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

Figure 11.27 – Synthetic light curve of V1647 (blue curve) for 0º orbital
inclination; note that the “bump” occurs at periastron phase (0.183P) when the
stars are at maximum tidal distortion and therefore brightest. The light variation is
entirely due to the changing shapes and sizes of the stars in their eccentric orbits.
Another interesting complication is that most eccentric orbit binaries are not
synchronized in rotation in the circular orbit sense of that word. Hut (1981) has
shown that tidal forces between the stars, greatest at periastron, will eventually
bring the stars into a "sort of" synchronism that makes the angular rotational
velocity of the stars equal to their revolution angular velocities only at periastron.
This pseudosynchronism is automatically calculated by Binary Maker 3 but
completely asynchronous rotation can also be modeled via the rotational
parameters F1 and F2 as in the circular orbit case.
It should be obvious that fitting an eccentric orbit binary is much more complex
than for a circular orbit system. If a radial velocity curve is available the job is
greatly simplified because the eccentricity, mass ratio and longitude of periastron
can be determined directly from the radial velocity curve itself.

Single Star Spot Modeling

Binary Maker 3 can be used to model single rotating stars with spots. Although
the second star cannot be "shut off," the system can be set so that the secondary
star has virtually no influence on the larger spotted star. Although many
possibilities are possible, the following scenario works very well:
1. Set the Input mode to Radius
2. Set the grid values: latitude = 40 and longitude = 80
3. Enter a mass ratio of 0.0001

262
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

4. Set the radius of star 1 at 0.1

5. Set the radius of star 2 at 0.0005
6. Set the temperature of star 1 at whatever temperature you believe it
actually is
7. Set the temperature of star 2 to 400 K
8. Set the gravity darkening and limb darkening of star 1 to values
appropriate for its temperature
9. Set the gravity darkening and limb darkening of star 2 to zero
10. Set the reflection coefficients of both stars to zero
11. Set third light to zero
12. The other parameters (inclination, phase normalization, etc.) are up to the
user
13. Place spots on star 1 wherever needed to match the observed data
Very successful single spotted star modeling can be effectively accomplished via
the above scenario. You can zoom in to the large star (using the F1 user function
key) to make it appear as large as desired.

The model below, shown in Figure 11.28, using the basic parameters described
above but with a temperature of 6000 K and two cool spots produced the light
curve beneath shown in Figure 11.29:

Figure 11.28 - Two spots on a "single star" in Binary Maker 3

263
C H A P T E R 1 1 - L I G H T C U R V E A N A L Y S I S

Figure 11.29 - Light curve produced by the "single star" model above

264
 12
Chapter
T E A C H I N G S U G G E S T I O N S

Teaching Suggestions
Several suggestions are offered for using Binary Maker 3 as a teaching tool.

B inary Maker 3 is an extremely effective tool when used in the classroom

to demonstrate the principles of light curve and radial velocity curve
analysis. When coupled with a computer video projector, Binary Maker 3
can take apparently dull and opaque material and turn it into a visually interesting
and understandable subject. When the basic ideas behind light and radial velocity
curves are explained in class and then sample systems are presented, it has been
our experience that even non-science students can clearly understand the
fundamental principles of light curves, such as:
• that spherical stars are flagged by essentially constant light outside of
eclipse
• that non-spherical stars exhibit light variation throughout the light curve
because of their shape
• that different eclipse depths signify different temperature stars, the deeper
eclipse indicating that the hotter star has been eclipsed (at least in circular
orbits)
• that there seems to be continuous progression of binary types from
detached, near contact, contact and overcontact systems perhaps implying
an evolution through these types
• that there are many exotic binary star systems (like AW UMa, RZ Sct, ER
Vul, V471 Tau, WR20a)
A sample elementary lab accompanies the installation CD of Binary Maker 3 in
Microsoft Word format. Teachers should feel free to edit that sample lab to suit
their needs.

In a computer laboratory situation a typical exercise for the program is to give

students sample light curves (over 200 are supplied with the program) and a

265
T E A C H I N G S U G G E S T I O N S

partially correct parameter file (BM3 file), i.e., a parameter file with certain values
that are incorrect, like inclination, a temperature, star size, etc. Students can then
try to fit the light curve by experimenting by changing the incorrect value(s).
There are so many sample sets that each student could be given a different binary
if desired.

Class Presentation
In an undergraduate astronomy class eclipsing binaries can be discussed in the
following outline form:
• Introduction to binary stars and their importance to astronomy in general
• Introduction to spectroscopic binaries and radial velocity curves (assuming
spectroscopy and Doppler shifts have already been discussed elsewhere)
• Introduction to eclipsing binaries and light curves; time versus brightness
=> phase versus brightness
• Main types of binaries: detached (GZ CMa, EE Peg and AI Cru), semi-
detached (Beta Persei or AS Eri), near-contact (V1010 Oph or AK CMi),
contact (RZ Dra or BX Peg), overcontact (AB And, CC Com or AD Cnc)
and double contact (RZ Sct or SW Cyg)
• Eccentric binaries: V1647 Sgr, V1143 Cyg, V380 Cyg
• Eclipsing binaries of special interest: AW UMa (most extreme mass ratio
overcontact), ER Vul (heavily spotted asymmetric light curve), NY Cep
(no secondary eclipse because of eccentric orbit), V471 Tau (white dwarf
and main sequence star), WR20a (most massive binary pair known as of
September 2004; see figure below)

Figure 12.1 - WR20a, the most massive binary known as of 2004, with Sun drawn
to scale as the red circle

266
T E A C H I N G S U G G E S T I O N S

Other example systems can be investigated via the on-line eclipsing binary
database at [Link] The many binaries located there can be
sorted according to type and their parameters and light curves are readily
accessible. Many of the binaries located in this on-line catalog are in the Zip
library included with Binary Maker 3.

Lab Suggestions
1. Give students several light curve files (Zip files that you have constructed
using the program) where you have changed one or more of the
parameters (say the temperature of star 2 and/or the orbital inclination)
and have the students attempt to fit the light curves by adjusting
parameters. You decide whether or not to tell them which parameters
have been adjusted. Perhaps tell them for the first few and then let them
use that experience to fit other systems.
2. Give the students a semi-detached light curve and tell them that star 2 fills
its inner lagrangian surface. Have them enter a -1 (flag for filling the
critical Roche potential) for the radius of star 2 and do not give them the
radius, temperature of star 1 or the orbital inclination.
3. Create your own binary system with completely fabricated parameters and
export a synthetic light curve for the students to fit. You decide how
many parameters to give them and in what form. For example, you could
give them a color index or spectral type, and then just let them work
towards a solution. This kind of exercise should be reserved for more
advanced students who have had some experience in light curves already.
4. Give the students actual light curves from CALEB
([Link] or the Zip library and let them attempt to solve
them giving them whatever clues you want.
5. Use the sample Lab included on the CD modified for your particular
student level.

267
B I B L I O G R A P H Y

Bibliography
Recommended literature for learning more about binary stars:
Binary Stars - A Pictorial Atlas. Terrell, D., Mukherjee, J.D., and Wilson, R.E. (1992).
Kriegar Publishing Co., Malabar, Florida. - This is the best written source of binary
system parameters. It also has 3D images of the binaries revolving. An excellent
companion to Binary Maker 3.
Eighth Catalogue of the Orbital Elements of Spectroscopic Binary Systems. eds. A.H. Batten,
J.M. Fletcher and D.G. MacCarthy, Publ. Dominion Astrophys. Obs., 17, 1989. - This is
the best single source of references to spectroscopic data in the professional
literature.
Binary Stars: A Look at Some Interesting Developments, by R.E. Wilson, in The New
Astronomy and Space Science Reader, eds. J.C. Brandt & S.P. Maran, Freeman: San
Francisco 1977, p. 164. Reprinted from Mercury, the Journal of the Astronomical
Society of the Pacific, Sept/Oct. 1974 issue. - This is perhaps the best brief
introduction to the concepts of Roche lobe representations of binary stars. I highly
recommend it to anyone who does not have specific training in this field.
The following books contain numerous articles concerning binary stars, usually
discussing one or more specific systems. They are all at the professional level. The
first three books are "classics" of the field, and may be difficult to locate.
An Introduction to the Study of Eclipsing Variables, Z. Kopal, Harvard University Press,
Cambridge, MA: 1946.
Close Binary Stars. Z. Kopal, John Wiley & Sons, New York: 1959.
Properties of Double Stars. L. Binnendijk, Univ. of Pa. Press, Philadelphia: 1960.
Eclipsing Variable Stars. ed. V.P. Tsesevich, Halsted Press, 1973.
Structure and Evolution of Close Binary Systems. eds. P. Eggleton, S. Mitton, and J.
Whelan, Reidel Publishers, 1976.
Interacting Binary Stars. eds. J. Sahade & F.B. Wood, Pergamon Press, 1978.
Double Stars. W.D. Heintz, D. Reidel Publishing Co., Dordrecht: 1978.
Binary and Multiple Stars as Tracers of Stellar Evolution. eds. Z. Kopal & J. Rahe, Reidel
Publishers, 1982.
Interacting Binary Stars. eds. J.E. Pringle & R.A. Wade, Cambridge Univ. Press,
Cambridge: 1985.

268
B I B L I O G R A P H Y

Active Close Binaries. ed. C. İbanoğlu. Kluwer Academic Publ., Dordrecht: 1990.
Evolutionary Processes in Interacting Binary Stars. eds. Y. Kondo, R.F. Sisteró, and R.S.
Polidan, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1992.
Light Curve Modeling of Binary Stars. ed. E.F. Milone, Spinger-Verlag, Dordrecht: 1993.
The Realm of Interacting Binary Stars. eds. J. Sahade et al., Kluwer Academic Publishers,
1993.
New Frontiers in Binary Star Research. eds. K.-C. Leung & I.-S. Nha, Astron Soc. Pac.
Conference Series, Vol. 38, 1993.
Eclipsing Binary Stars: Modeling and Analysis. J. Kallrath & E.F. Milone, SpringerVerlag,
Dordrecht 1999.
An Introduction to Close Binary Stars. R.W. Hilditch, Cambridge University Press,
Cambridge: 2001.

269
R E F E R E N C E S

References
Al Naimiy, H.M. (1978) Astrophys. Space Sci. 53, 181.
Andersen, J. (1975) Astron. Astrophys. 44, 445.
Andersen, J., Clausen, J.V. and Nordström, B. (1985) Astron. Astrophys. Suppl. Ser. 59,
349.
Anderson, L. and Shu, F.H. (1979) Ap. J. Sup. Ser. 40, 667.
Anderson, L., Raff. M. and Shu, F.H. (1980) in Close Binary Stars: Observations and
Interpretation, eds. M.J. Plavec, D.M. Popper, and R.K. Ulrich (Reidel), p. 485.
Bell, S.A., Kilkenny, D. and Malcolm, G.J. (1987) Mon. Not. R. Astr. Soc. 226, 879.
Binnendijk, L. (1960) Properties of Double Stars, U. of Penn. Press, Philadelphia
Binnendijk, L. (1977) Vistas Astron. 21, 359.
Binnendijk, L. (1984) Publ. Astron Soc. Pac. 96, 646.
Bradstreet, D.H. (1985) Ap. J. Suppl. Ser. 58, 413.
Bradstreet, D.H. (1990) Bull. A.A.S. 22, 1293.
Bradstreet, D.H. (1991) Bull. A.A.S. 23, 1414.
Clausen, J.V. and Nordström, B. (1978a) Astron. Astrophys. Suppl. Ser. 31, 307.
Clausen, J.V. and Nordström, B. (1978b) Astron. Astrophys. 67, 15.
Duerbeck, H.W. (1978) Astron. Astrophys. Suppl. Ser. 32, 361.
Ebbighausen, E.G. (1971) A.J. 76, 460.
Etzel, P.B. (1993) in Light Curve Modeling of Eclipsing Binary Stars, ed. E.F. Milone,
Springer-Verlag:New York, p. 113.
Grønbech, B. (1976) Astron. Astrophys. Suppl. 24, 399.
Güdür, N., Gülmen, Ö., Sezer, C. and Sengonca, H. (1983) Astron. Astrophys. Suppl.
Ser. 51, 27.
Guinan, E.F., Ribas, I., Fitzpatrick, E.L., Giménez, Á., Jordi, C., McCook, G.P. &
Popper, D.M. (2000) Ap.J. 544, 409
Hill, G. (1989) Astron. Astrophys. 218, 141.

270
R E F E R E N C E S

Hill, G., Fisher, W.A., and Holmgren, D. (1989) Astron. Astrophys. 218, 152.
Hill, G., Fisher, W.A., and Holmgren, D. (1990) Astron. Astrophys. 238, 145.
Hill, G. and Rucinski, S.M. (1993) in Light Curve Modeling of Eclipsing Binary Stars, ed.
E.F. Milone, Springer-Verlag:New York, p. 135.
Hrivnak, B.J. (1988) Ap. J. 335, 319.
Hrivnak, B.J., Guinan, E.F. & Lu, W. (1995) Ap.J. 455, 300.
Hut, P. (1981) Astron. Astrophys. 99, 126.
Jiang, Z., Leung, K.-C. and Shen, L. (1983) A.J. 88, 1679.
Kang, Y.W. and Wilson, R.E. (1989) A.J. 97, 848.
Kim, C.-H., Lee, J.W., Kim, S.-L., Han, W. and Koch, R.H. (2003) A.J. 125, 322.
Koch, R.H. (1960) A.J. 65, 139.
Kopal, Z. (1959) Close Binary Systems, Wiley:New York.
Kurucz, R.L. (1991) Harvard Preprint 3348.
Lacy, C.H. and Popper, D.M. (1984) Ap.J. 281, 268.
Lucy, L.B. (1967) Zs. f. Ap. 65, 89.
Maceroni, C., Vilhi, O., van’t Veer, F. and van Hamme, W. (1994) Astron. Astrophys.
288, 529.
Milone, E.F., Groisman, G., Fry, D.J.I., and Bradstreet, D.H. (1991) Ap. J. 370, 677.
Mochnacki, S.W. (1981) Ap. J. 245, 650.
Mochnacki, S.W. and Doughty, N.A. (1972) Mon. Not. Roy. Astr. Soc. 156, 51.
Popper, D.M., Andersen, J., Clausen, J.V. and Nordström, B. (1985) A.J. 90, 1324.
Rensing, M.J., Mochnacki, S.W., and Bolton, C.T. (1985) A.J. 90, 767.
Richards, M.T., Mochnacki, S.W., and Bolton, C.T. (1988) A.J. 96, 326.
Rigterink, P.V. (1973) Astron. Astrophys. Suppl. Ser. 12, 313.
Robertson, J.A. and Eggleton, P.P. (1977) Mon. Not. Roy. Astr. Soc. 179, 359.
Rucinski, S.M. (1969) Acta. Astron. 19, 245.

271
R E F E R E N C E S

Rucinski, S.M. (1985) in Interacting Binary Stars, eds. J.E. Pringle and R.A. Wade
(Cambridge), p. 85.
Rucinski, S.M. (1992) A. J. 104, 1968.
Samec, R.G. (1989) Publ. Astron. Soc. Pac. 101, 661.
Samec, R.G., Fuller, R. and Kaitchuck, R. (1989a) A.J. 97, 1159.
Samec, R.G., Van Hamme, W. and Bookmyer, B.B. (1989b) A.J. 98, 2287.
Samec, R.G., Carrigan, B.J., Gray, J.D., French, J.A., McDermith, R.J. and Padgen,
E.E. (1998) A.J. 116, 895.
Van Hamme, W. (1993) A.J. 106, 2096.
Van Hamme, W. and Wilson, R.E. (1984) Astron. Astrophys. 141, 1.
Vogt, S.S. and Penrod, G.D. (1983) Publ. Astron. Soc. Pac. 95, 565.
von Zeipel, H. (1924) Mon. Not. R. Astron. Soc. 84, 665.
Wilson, R.E. (1979) Ap. J. 234, 1054.
Wilson, R.E. (1990) Ap. J. 356, 613.
Wilson, R.E. (1993) in New Frontiers in Interacting Binary Star Research, ed. K.C. Leung
(Astron. Soc. Pac. Conference Series 38, 91)
Wilson, R.E., and Devinney, E.J., (1971) Ap. J. 166, 605.
Wilson, R.E., and Sofia, S. (1976) Ap. J. 203, 182.

272
A P P E N D I C E S

Appendices
Catalog and Atlas of Eclipsing Binaries
(CALEB)

Figure A.1 – CALEB homepage graphic

The Catalog and Atlas of Eclipsing Binaries (CALEB) is a website
(http:\\[Link]) that catalogs many of the eclipsing binaries that have
been published. It includes binary parameters, the original multifiltered light
curves and radial velocity curves (all of which can be viewed and/or downloaded),
basic observations data such as magnitude, period, binary type, color indices, etc.,
as well as diagrams and graphs produced from Binary Maker 3 to illustrate the
systems and their data. The database allows for simple as well as complex data
searches based on the parameters of the systems, and it also includes ZIP files that
can be downloaded and run immediately with Binary Maker 3.
Additional binary systems will be added to the database and are freely accessible to
anyone. If you have binary systems that you wish to contribute to CALEB, please
contact David H. Bradstreet at dbradstr@[Link].

273
A P P E N D I C E S

Listing of Binary Systems in Zip folder

228 eclipsing binary systems are given in the Zip folder included with Binary
Maker 3. These represent many of the binaries in the Catalog and Atlas of
Eclipsing Binaries (CALEB). They are organized within the Zip folder in
individual folders named by constellation (official three letter abbreviation). For
example, the filenames for GZ CMa (found within the constellation folder named
CMa) look like the following:

GZCMa_Popper1985b.zip
GZCMa_Popper1985u.zip
GZCMa_Popper1985v.zip
GZCMa_Popper1985y.zip

The system’s name is first, followed by the name of the model in CALEB that
includes the filter designation (here the Strömgren filters uvby), and of course the
zip file extension.

For aid in locating individual systems, the binaries are listed below in three
different ways: alphabetically by constellation, by binary type, and eccentric
systems.

Listed alphabetically by constellation

Andromeda RT And
AB And
AN And
BX And
CN And
Antlia S Ant
Aquarius RY Aqr
BW Aqr
CX Aqr
CZ Aqr
DV Aqr
EE Aqr
HV Aqr
Aquila KP Aql
V346 Aql
V417 Aql
V1182 Aql
Ara V535 Ara
V539 Ara
Aries RX Ari
SS Ari

274
A P P E N D I C E S

Auriga SX Aur
TT Aur
AH Aur
AR Aur
HS Aur
IM Aur
Bootes 44 Boo
AD Boo
Camelopardalis AW Cam
AY Cam
DN Cam
FN Cam
Cancer AD Cnc
Canis Major RT CMa
SW CMa
CW CMa
FZ CMa
GZ CMa
AK CMi
Carina ST Car
EM Car
GL Car
GW Car
QX Car
WR 20a
Cassiopeia RZ Cas
TW Cas
AB Cas
AO Cas
CW Cas
GG Cas
MN Cas
MU Cas
OX Cas
V364 Cas
V375 Cas
V459 Cas
V523 Cas
Centaurus ST Cen
SZ Cen
LZ Cen
V346 Cen
V701 Cen
V747 Cen
V752 Cen

275
A P P E N D I C E S

V757 Cen
Cepheus SU Cep
AH Cep
CW Cep
EG Cep
EK Cep
GK Cep
GW Cep
NN Cep
NY Cep
V497 Cep
Cetus TW Cet
TX Cet
Chamaeleon RS Cha
RZ Cha
Columba RS Col
Coma CC Com
Berenices
EK Com
Corona TY CrA
Australis
TZ CrA
FS CrA
Corona RT CrB
Borealis
Crater V Crt
Crux AI Cru
Cygnus SW Cyg
BR Cyg
DK Cyg
DL Cyg
MR Cyg
V380 Cyg
V382 Cyg
V388 Cyg
V442 Cyg
V448 Cyg
V463 Cyg
V470 Cyg
V477 Cyg
V478 Cyg
V508 Cyg
V541 Cyg
V700 Cyg
V729 Cyg

276
A P P E N D I C E S

V836 Cyg
V885 Cyg
V909 Cyg
V1073 Cyg
V1143 Cyg
V1425 Cyg
Delphinus DM Del
Draco RZ Dra
UZ Dra
AX Dra
BS Dra
EF Dra
FU Dra
Eridanus AS Eri
Fornax TZ For
Gemini AF Gem
AL Gem
Grus RU Gru
Hercules AD Her
DI Her
V338 Her
V624 Her
V728 Her
V899 Her
Horologium SY Hor
Hydra WY Hya
AI Hya
AV Hya
HS Hya
KW Hya
Chi2 Hya
Indus RS Ind
RY Ind
Lacerta VY Lac
AW Lac
V364 Lac
Leo TX Leo
UV Leo
UZ Leo
EX Leo
Leo Minor T LMi
Lupus DT Lup
GG Lup
Lynx SW Lyn
UU Lyn

277
A P P E N D I C E S

UV Lyn
Lyra TT Lyr
TZ Lyr
FL Lyr
Mensa TY Men
TZ Men
UX Men
Monoceros RW Mon
VV Mon
AR Mon
DD Mon
FS Mon
Musca TU Mus
TV Mus
BR Mus
Ophiuchus V451 Oph
V502 Oph
V508 Oph
V1010 Oph
V2388 Oph
Orion EW Ori
GG Ori
V1031 Ori
Pavo BF Pav
HY Pav
Pegasus BO Peg
EE Peg
Perseus HW Per
IQ Per
V432 Per
Phoenix Zeta Phe
AE Phe
AG Phe
AI Phe
Pisces VZ Psc
Puppis V Pup
UZ Pup
NO Pup
PV Pup
Pyxis RZ Pyx
TY Pyx
VV Pyx
Sagittarius V523 Sgr
V526 Sgr
V1647 Sgr

278
A P P E N D I C E S

V3903 Sgr
Scorpius V499 Sco
V701 Sco
V760 Sco
V906 Sco
V954 Sco
Sculptor RT Scl
Scutum RZ Sct
FG Sct
Serpens EG Ser
OU Ser
Taurus CD Tau
EQ Tau
V471 Tau
Ursa Major TX UMa
TY UMa
AW UMa
DN UMa
LP UMa
Ursa Minor RU Umi
Vela AO Vel
AS Vel
CV Vel
EO Vel
Virgo AW Vir
DM Vir
Vulpecula BI Vul
BP Vul
BS Vul
ER Vul

279
A P P E N D I C E S

Eclipsing Binary AW Lac

UZ Leo
Systems in the Zip EX Leo
UV Lyn
folder listed TY Men
TU Mus
alphabetically by TV Mus
binary type BR Mus
V502 Oph
V508 Oph
Overcontact (59) V2388 Oph
AB And BF Pav
S Ant HY Pav
HV Aqr V432 Per
V417 Aql AE Phe
V535 Ara UZ Pup
SS Ari V701 Sco
AH Aur FG Sct
44 Boo OU Ser
DN Cam EQ Tau
FN Cam TY UMa
AD Cnc AW UMa
AO Cas LP UMa
CW Cas AW Vir
V523 Cas BI Vul
V752 Cen
V757 Cen
SU Cep Contact (6)
GW Cep BX And
TW Cet DM Del
RS Col RZ Dra
CC Com HW Per
EK Com RT Scl
FS CrA BS Vul
DK Cyg
V382 Cyg Near Contact (31)
V508 Cyg CN And
V700 Cyg CX Aqr
V729 Cyg EE Aqr
V1073 Cyg SX Aur
EF Dra TT Aur
FU Dra AW Cam
V728 Her AK CMi
V899 Her GW Car
SY Hor V375 Cas

280
A P P E N D I C E S

Near Contact (cont.) AF Gem

AL Gem
V701 Cen
AD Her
V747 Cen
V338 Her
EG Cep
T LMi
GK Cep
DT Lup
AI Cru
TT Lyr
V388 Cyg
RW Mon
V836 Cyg
AR Mon
V1425 Cyg
DD Mon
AX Dra
BO Peg
AV Hya
V Pup
RS Ind
TX UMa
RY Ind
VY Lac
SW Lyn Detached (100)
UU Lyn
RT And
TZ Lyr
AN And
V1010 Oph
BW Aqr
VZ Psc
DV Aqr
RZ Pyx
KP Aql
V954 Sco
V1182 Aql
RU UMi
V539 Ara
RU Dum
RX Ari
AR Aur
Semi-detached (31) HS Aur
IM Aur
RY Aqr
AD Boo
CZ Aqr
AY Cam
V346 Aql
SW CMa
RT CMa
CW CMa
ST Car
FZ CMa
RZ Cas
GZ CMa
TW Cas
EM Car
AB Cas
GL Car
GG Cas
QX Car
TX Cet
WR 20a
TZ CrA
MN Cas
V Crt
MU Cas
BR Cyg
OX Cas
DL Cyg
V364 Cas
MR Cyg
V459 Cas
V448 Cyg
ST Cen
V463 Cyg
SZ Cen
AS Eri
LZ Cen

281
A P P E N D I C E S

Detached (cont.) V1031 Ori

EE Peg
V346 Cen
IQ Per
AH Cep
Zeta Phe
CW Cep
AG Phe
EK Cep
AI Phe
NN Cep
NO Pup
NY Cep
PV Pup
V497Cep
TY Pyx
RS Cha
VV Pyx
RZ Cha
V523 Sgr
TY CrA
V526 Sgr
RT CrB
V1647 Sgr
V380 Cyg
V3903 Sgr
V442 Cyg
V499 Sco
V470 Cyg
V760 Sco
V477 Cyg
V906 Sco
V478 Cyg
EG Ser
V541 Cyg
CD Tau
V885 Cyg
V471 Tau
V909 Cyg
DN UMa
V1143 Cyg
AO Vel
UZ Dra
AS Vel
BS Dra
CV Vel
TZ For
EO Vel
RU Gru
DM Vir
DI Her
BP Vul
V624 Her
ER Vul
WY Hya
AI Hya
HS Hya Double contact (2)
KW Hya SW Cyg
Chi2 Hya RZ Sct
V364 Lac
TX Leo
UV Leo
GG Lup
FL Lyr
TZ Men
UX Men
VV Mon
FS Mon
V451 Oph
EW Ori
GG Ori

282
A P P E N D I C E S

Eccentric Eclipsing Binary Systems in the

Zip folder listed by eccentricity (44)
System Eccentricity
V1143 Cyg (0.5406)
DI Her (0.489)
NY Cep (0.48)
V541 Cyg (0.479)
V1647 Sgr (0.413)
V477 Cyg (0.331)
SW CMa (0.3179)
V346 Cen (0.288)
V364 Lac (0.2873)
QX Car (0.278)
V380 Cyg (0.234)
AI Hya (0.2301)
GG Ori (0.2218)
V526 Sgr (0.2194)
EO Vel (0.208)
MU Cas (0.193)
AI Phe (0.189)
BW Aqr (0.17)
V523 Sgr (0.162)
GG Lup (0.15)
GL Car (0.1457)
NO Pup (0.123)
EK Cep (0.109)
VV Pyx (0.0956)
KW Hya (0.0945)
AO Vel (0.0761)
IQ Per (0.075)
EW Ori (0.068)
TX Leo (0.06)
V539 Ara (0.053)
PV Pup (0.0503)
OX Cas (0.038)
BP Vul (0.0355)
TZ Men (0.035)
V478 Cyg (0.0295)
CW Cep (0.0293)
V760 Sco (0.0265)
V459 Cas (0.0243)
DN UMa (0.015)

283
A P P E N D I C E S

V451 Oph (0.0125)

EM Car (0.012)
Zeta Phe (0.0113)
V906 Sco (0.0054)
UX Men (0.0026)

284
A P P E N D I C E S

Linear Limb Darkening Tables from Al Naimiy (1978) Ap. Sp. Sci. 53,
181.
Reprinted with permission of Kluwer Academic Publishers.
Teff log g 2000 Ǻ 3000 Ǻ 3600 Ǻ 4000 Ǻ 4500 Ǻ 5000 Ǻ 5500 Ǻ 6000 Ǻ 7000 Ǻ 8000 Ǻ 10000 Ǻ 12000 Ǻ 16000 Ǻ 22000 Ǻ

50000 5.0 0.29 0.21 0.18 0.19 0.17 0.15 0.14 0.13 0.11 0.10 0.08 0.07 0.05 0.04

40000 5.0 0.33 0.24 0.21 0.22 0.20 0.18 0.17 0.15 0.13 0.12 0.10 0.09 0.07 0.05

30000 4.0 0.51 0.38 0.32 0.34 0.32 0.29 0.27 0.25 0.22 0.20 0.18 0.16 0.13 0.10

25000 4.0 0.58 0.40 0.33 0.37 0.34 0.31 0.28 0.26 0.22 0.20 0.18 0.15 0.12 0.10

20000 4.0 0.65 0.43 0.34 0.39 0.36 0.32 0.30 0.27 0.23 0.20 0.18 0.15 0.12 0.09

20000 3.0 0.66 0.46 0.38 0.43 0.40 0.37 0.34 0.31 0.27 0.24 0.22 0.19 0.15 0.11

18000 4.0 0.68 0.44 0.34 0.41 0.38 0.34 0.31 0.28 0.24 0.20 0.19 0.16 0.13 0.09

18000 3.0 0.68 0.46 0.37 0.44 0.41 0.37 0.34 0.31 0.27 0.23 0.22 0.18 0.15 0.11

16000 4.0 0.73 0.46 0.35 0.43 0.40 0.35 0.32 0.30 0.25 0.21 0.20 0.17 0.13 0.09

16000 3.0 0.72 0.48 0.37 0.45 0.42 0.38 0.35 0.32 0.27 0.23 0.22 0.19 0.15 0.11

14000 4.0 0.79 0.49 0.36 0.45 0.42 0.38 0.34 0.31 0.27 0.23 0.21 0.18 0.14 0.10

14000 3.0 0.78 0.50 0.38 0.47 0.44 0.39 0.36 0.33 0.28 0.24 0.23 0.20 0.16 0.11

12000 4.0 0.87 0.53 0.38 0.49 0.47 0.41 0.38 0.35 0.29 0.25 0.24 0.20 0.16 0.11

12000 3.0 0.86 0.54 0.39 0.50 0.48 0.42 0.39 0.36 0.30 0.26 0.25 0.21 0.17 0.09

12000 2.0 0.83 0.56 0.42 0.53 0.50 0.46 0.42 0.39 0.34 0.30 0.29 0.25 0.21 0.15

11000 4.0 0.93 0.56 0.40 0.52 0.48 0.44 0.40 0.37 0.31 0.26 0.25 0.21 0.17 0.12

11000 3.0 0.92 0.56 0.40 0.53 0.49 0.44 0.41 0.38 0.32 0.27 0.26 0.22 0.18 0.13

11000 2.0 0.89 0.58 0.43 0.55 0.52 0.47 0.44 0.41 0.35 0.30 0.30 0.25 0.22 0.16

10000 4.5 0.98 0.57 0.40 0.56 0.51 0.47 0.43 0.39 0.33 0.28 0.26 0.22 0.18 0.13

10000 4.0 0.98 0.57 0.39 0.55 0.51 0.47 0.43 0.39 0.33 0.28 0.26 0.22 0.18 0.13

10000 4.0 0.96 0.55 0.39 0.54 0.50 0.45 0.41 0.38 0.32 0.27 0.26 0.21 0.17 0.12

(10 x metals)

10000 4.0 0.99 0.58 0.40 0.56 0.51 0.47 0.43 0.39 0.33 0.28 0.27 0.22 0.18 0.13

(1/10 x metals)

285
A P P E N D I C E S

Teff log g 2000 Ǻ 3000 Ǻ 3600 Ǻ 4000 Ǻ 4500 Ǻ 5000 Ǻ 5500 Ǻ 6000 Ǻ 7000 Ǻ 8000 Ǻ 10000 Ǻ 12000 Ǻ 16000 Ǻ 22000 Ǻ

10000 3.5 0.99 0.57 0.39 0.55 0.51 0.47 0.42 0.39 0.33 0.28 0.27 0.22 0.18 0.13

10000 3.0 0.99 0.57 0.40 0.56 0.51 0.47 0.43 0.40 0.37 0.29 0.27 0.23 0.19 0.13

10000 2.0 0.97 0.59 0.43 0.56 0.52 0.49 0.45 0.42 0.36 0.31 0.30 0.26 0.22 0.16

9500 4.0 1.00 0.59 0.40 0.59 0.54 0.49 0.45 0.41 0.34 0.29 0.28 0.23 0.19 0.13

9500 3.0 1.00 0.59 0.41 0.58 0.53 0.49 0.45 0.41 0.35 0.30 0.28 0.24 0.20 0.14

9000 4.0 1.00 0.60 0.42 0.63 0.57 0.52 0.47 0.43 0.36 0.30 0.29 0.24 0.20 0.14

9000 3.0 1.00 0.60 0.41 0.61 0.56 0.52 0.47 0.43 0.36 0.31 0.30 0.24 0.20 0.15

9000 2.0 1.00 0.61 0.42 0.60 0.56 0.52 0.48 0.44 0.38 0.33 0.32 0.27 0.22 0.16

8500 4.0 0.64 0.47 0.69 0.62 0.56 0.51 0.46 0.38 0.33 0.31 0.26 0.21 0.16

8500 3.0 0.62 0.64 0.65 0.60 0.55 0.50 0.45 0.38 0.32 0.31 0.26 0.21 0.16

8000 4.5 1.00 0.72 0.55 0.70 0.64 0.59 0.54 0.50 0.42 0.28 0.34 0.29 0.24 0.18

8000 4.0 0.70 0.53 0.72 0.66 0.60 0.55 0.50 0.42 0.36 0.34 0.28 0.23 0.17

8000 4.0 0.70 0.53 0.72 0.66 0.60 0.55 0.50 0.42 0.36 0.34 0.28 0.23 0.17

8000 4.0 0.69 0.52 0.76 0.69 0.62 0.55 0.50 0.42 0.35 0.34 0.28 0.23 0.17

(No Conv.)

8000 3.5 0.68 0.51 0.74 0.67 0.61 0.55 0.50 0.41 0.35 0.34 0.28 0.23 0.17

8000 3.0 0.66 0.49 0.73 0.66 0.60 0.54 0.49 0.41 0.35 0.34 0.28 0.22 0.17

8000 2.0 0.64 0.47 0.69 0.63 0.58 0.53 0.49 0.41 0.35 0.34 0.28 0.23 0.17

7500 4.0 0.74 0.58 0.74 0.68 0.63 0.57 0.52 0.44 0.38 0.36 0.31 0.25 0.19

(L/H = 1.5)

7500 4.0 1.00 0.77 0.60 0.70 0.65 0.61 0.56 0.52 0.45 0.39 0.36 0.31 0.26 0.20

(L/H = 2.5)

7500 4.0 0.73 0.57 0.83 0.74 0.66 0.59 0.53 0.44 0.38 0.36 0.30 0.24 0.19

(No Conv.)

7500 3.0 0.70 0.53 0.78 0.71 0.64 0.58 0.53 0.44 0.37 0.36 0.30 0.24 0.18

7000 4.0 0.78 0.63 0.78 0.71 0.65 0.59 0.54 0.46 0.40 0.37 0.32 0.26 0.20

286
A P P E N D I C E S

Teff log g 2000 Ǻ 3000 Ǻ 3600 Ǻ 4000 Ǻ 4500 Ǻ 5000 Ǻ 5500 Ǻ 6000 Ǻ 7000 Ǻ 8000 Ǻ 10000 Ǻ 12000 Ǻ 16000 Ǻ 22000 Ǻ

7000 4.0 0.77 0.62 0.88 0.77 0.68 0.61 0.55 0.50 0.40 0.37 0.32 0.26 0.20

(No Conv.)

7000 3.0 0.73 0.57 0.79 0.72 0.67 0.60 0.54 0.46 0.39 0.37 0.31 0.25 0.19

7000 2.0 0.69 0.53 0.83 0.74 0.67 0.60 0.54 0.44 0.38 0.36 0.31 0.25 0.19

6500 4.0 0.82 0.68 0.80 0.72 0.66 0.60 0.55 0.47 0.41 0.37 0.33 0.28 0.22

6500 3.0 0.77 0.62 0.82 0.74 0.67 0.61 0.55 0.47 0.41 0.38 0.33 0.27 0.21

6000 4.5 0.90 0.77 0.81 0.73 0.67 0.61 0.56 0.49 0.43 0.37 0.34 0.29 0.23

6000 4.0 0.90 0.76 0.83 0.75 0.68 0.62 0.57 0.49 0.43 0.38 0.35 0.29 0.23

6000 4.0 0.94 0.81 0.86 0.78 0.71 0.64 0.59 0.51 0.45 0.39 0.36 0.31 0.25

(No Blkt.)

6000 4.0 0.90 0.75 0.88 0.77 0.69 0.63 0.57 0.48 0.43 0.38 0.35 0.29 0.23

(No Conv.)

6000 4.0 0.96 0.81 0.90 0.80 0.71 0.65 0.59 0.51 0.45 0.39 0.36 0.31 0.25

(10 x metals)

6000 4.0 0.28 0.98 0.82 0.93 0.81 0.73 0.66 0.60 0.52 0.46 0.40 0.36 0.31 0.24

(1/10 x metals)

6000 4.0 0.95 0.81 0.91 0.80 0.72 0.65 0.59 0.51 0.45 0.39 0.36 0.31 0.24

(No Conv. or Blkt.)

6000 3.5 0.87 0.73 0.84 0.76 0.69 0.63 0.58 0.50 0.44 0.39 0.35 0.29 0.23

6000 3.0 0.85 0.71 0.86 0.77 0.70 0.64 0.58 0.50 0.44 0.39 0.35 0.29 0.23

6000 2.0 0.80 0.65 0.87 0.78 0.71 0.64 0.58 0.49 0.43 0.39 0.34 0.28 0.22

5500 4.0 0.97 0.84 0.87 0.78 0.71 0.65 0.60 0.52 0.49 0.40 0.36 0.31 0.25

5500 3.0 0.94 0.80 0.90 0.81 0.73 0.66 0.61 0.52 0.46 0.40 0.37 0.31 0.25

5000 4.0 0.52 1.00 0.95 0.94 0.85 0.77 0.71 0.65 0.56 0.50 0.43 0.40 0.33 0.27

5000 3.0 0.56 1.00 0.92 0.96 0.86 0.78 0.71 0.65 0.56 0.50 0.43 0.40 0.34 0.27

287
A P P E N D I C E S

Teff log g 2000 Ǻ 3000 Ǻ 3600 Ǻ 4000 Ǻ 4500 Ǻ 5000 Ǻ 5500 Ǻ 6000 Ǻ 7000 Ǻ 8000 Ǻ 10000 Ǻ 12000 Ǻ 16000 Ǻ 22000 Ǻ

5000 2.0 0.60 0.99 0.87 0.97 0.87 0.78 0.71 0.65 0.56 0.50 0.43 0.40 0.33 0.27

4500 4.0 0.18 0.99 0.90 0.83 0.76 0.65 0.58 0.49 0.46 0.38 0.31

4500 3.0 0.20 1.00 0.91 0.83 0.76 0.66 0.59 0.50 0.46 0.38 0.31

4000 4.0 0.06 0.97 0.88 0.81 0.69 0.61 0.52 0.48 0.40 0.33

4000 3.0 0.00 0.97 0.88 0.81 0.69 0.61 0.51 0.48 0.42 0.33

4000 2.0 0.00 0.97 0.88 0.81 0.70 0.61 0.52 0.49 0.42 0.33

288
A P P E N D I C E S

Linear Limb Darkening Coefficients for specific bandpass filters

Adapted from Table 2 of Van Hamme (1993) with permission

Teff g bolo u v b y U B V R I Rc Ic
3500 0 0.481 0.735 0.895 1.087 0.987 0.745 1.031 0.970 0.825 0.627 0.879 0.707
3500 0.5 0.474 0.781 0.935 1.110 0.991 0.789 1.045 0.973 0.816 0.618 0.874 0.698
3500 1 0.466 0.831 0.960 1.123 0.990 0.832 1.051 0.973 0.804 0.611 0.867 0.689
3500 1.5 0.461 0.884 0.977 1.131 0.988 0.868 1.053 0.971 0.793 0.605 0.859 0.681
3500 2 0.455 0.929 0.982 1.135 0.984 0.893 1.050 0.967 0.781 0.601 0.849 0.674
3500 2.5 0.448 0.968 0.978 1.133 0.976 0.909 1.041 0.959 0.767 0.597 0.836 0.666
3500 3 0.436 0.984 0.944 1.097 0.945 0.905 1.003 0.929 0.748 0.583 0.815 0.652
3500 3.5 0.386 0.913 0.813 0.939 0.826 0.831 0.860 0.817 0.686 0.522 0.742 0.595
3500 4 0.322 0.837 0.699 0.780 0.702 0.756 0.725 0.695 0.609 0.453 0.651 0.527
3500 4.5 0.286 0.806 0.649 0.693 0.629 0.722 0.655 0.622 0.556 0.409 0.590 0.481
3500 5 0.270 0.815 0.650 0.651 0.591 0.723 0.630 0.582 0.524 0.384 0.553 0.453
3750 0 0.510 0.977 1.018 1.046 0.940 0.934 1.034 0.925 0.775 0.608 0.815 0.664
3750 0.5 0.509 1.018 1.046 1.066 0.944 0.970 1.050 0.928 0.778 0.604 0.818 0.665
3750 1 0.506 1.054 1.062 1.077 0.945 0.998 1.056 0.926 0.779 0.601 0.820 0.665
3750 1.5 0.504 1.089 1.071 1.085 0.946 1.022 1.059 0.925 0.780 0.599 0.822 0.666
3750 2 0.501 1.111 1.067 1.087 0.944 1.030 1.054 0.922 0.778 0.596 0.823 0.665
3750 2.5 0.496 1.123 1.054 1.085 0.939 1.026 1.044 0.916 0.775 0.593 0.822 0.662
3750 3 0.490 1.125 1.033 1.077 0.931 1.014 1.029 0.908 0.769 0.589 0.818 0.658
3750 3.5 0.471 1.086 0.971 1.030 0.891 0.967 0.975 0.869 0.742 0.568 0.790 0.636
3750 4 0.411 0.948 0.817 0.869 0.761 0.843 0.821 0.742 0.652 0.496 0.689 0.562
3750 4.5 0.341 0.825 0.688 0.710 0.632 0.737 0.681 0.618 0.556 0.420 0.582 0.481
3750 5 0.298 0.765 0.631 0.626 0.562 0.688 0.611 0.549 0.497 0.374 0.517 0.430
4000 0 0.518 1.125 1.067 1.001 0.891 1.078 1.007 0.883 0.726 0.581 0.764 0.626
4000 0.5 0.520 1.175 1.091 1.016 0.895 1.115 1.023 0.887 0.727 0.579 0.765 0.625
4000 1 0.521 1.211 1.105 1.026 0.896 1.137 1.033 0.887 0.727 0.578 0.765 0.625
4000 1.5 0.523 1.236 1.113 1.036 0.899 1.152 1.040 0.888 0.729 0.578 0.767 0.627
4000 2 0.522 1.246 1.110 1.040 0.899 1.151 1.041 0.885 0.731 0.577 0.768 0.628
4000 2.5 0.521 1.246 1.101 1.043 0.898 1.140 1.038 0.881 0.733 0.577 0.770 0.630
4000 3 0.519 1.237 1.086 1.043 0.896 1.120 1.030 0.876 0.735 0.576 0.772 0.631
4000 3.5 0.515 1.218 1.060 1.037 0.890 1.092 1.014 0.867 0.734 0.574 0.771 0.631
4000 4 0.493 1.157 0.993 0.990 0.848 1.027 0.959 0.824 0.705 0.550 0.740 0.606
4000 4.5 0.429 1.001 0.843 0.846 0.726 0.885 0.817 0.705 0.612 0.476 0.640 0.528
4000 5 0.356 0.849 0.711 0.694 0.602 0.760 0.680 0.586 0.512 0.399 0.533 0.444
4250 0 0.517 1.082 1.056 0.958 0.841 1.076 0.968 0.834 0.689 0.553 0.723 0.598
4250 0.5 0.521 1.137 1.079 0.969 0.845 1.115 0.983 0.839 0.689 0.553 0.724 0.597
4250 1 0.524 1.175 1.089 0.974 0.846 1.138 0.990 0.841 0.688 0.553 0.723 0.596
4250 1.5 0.528 1.204 1.095 0.979 0.849 1.153 0.998 0.845 0.689 0.554 0.725 0.597
4250 2 0.530 1.222 1.095 0.983 0.851 1.157 1.001 0.845 0.690 0.554 0.725 0.597
4250 2.5 0.531 1.233 1.092 0.987 0.852 1.155 1.002 0.845 0.690 0.554 0.725 0.597

289
A P P E N D I C E S

Teff g bolo u v b y U B V R I Rc Ic
4250 3 0.531 1.237 1.085 0.992 0.853 1.146 1.002 0.843 0.691 0.554 0.726 0.598
4250 3.5 0.530 1.231 1.072 0.993 0.852 1.128 0.996 0.839 0.692 0.554 0.727 0.599
4250 4 0.527 1.215 1.052 0.991 0.848 1.103 0.985 0.831 0.692 0.553 0.726 0.599
4250 4.5 0.505 1.163 0.996 0.954 0.813 1.044 0.940 0.794 0.666 0.532 0.699 0.577
4250 5 0.445 1.028 0.872 0.839 0.711 0.919 0.824 0.694 0.583 0.466 0.611 0.506
4500 0 0.511 0.999 1.027 0.920 0.791 1.025 0.930 0.785 0.649 0.524 0.679 0.568
4500 0.5 0.516 1.052 1.045 0.924 0.794 1.062 0.941 0.789 0.650 0.525 0.681 0.569
4500 1 0.521 1.092 1.054 0.926 0.796 1.087 0.947 0.791 0.651 0.526 0.682 0.568
4500 1.5 0.526 1.121 1.059 0.928 0.799 1.102 0.952 0.796 0.653 0.528 0.685 0.570
4500 2 0.530 1.141 1.058 0.929 0.802 1.109 0.955 0.799 0.655 0.529 0.686 0.571
4500 2.5 0.534 1.157 1.055 0.932 0.805 1.111 0.957 0.802 0.657 0.531 0.689 0.572
4500 3 0.536 1.167 1.051 0.935 0.807 1.108 0.957 0.804 0.658 0.532 0.690 0.572
4500 3.5 0.537 1.171 1.044 0.939 0.809 1.100 0.956 0.804 0.659 0.533 0.691 0.573
4500 4 0.536 1.169 1.033 0.940 0.808 1.086 0.952 0.801 0.659 0.533 0.691 0.573
4500 4.5 0.532 1.160 1.018 0.940 0.805 1.067 0.944 0.795 0.658 0.532 0.690 0.572
4500 5 0.515 1.125 0.980 0.915 0.781 1.025 0.912 0.767 0.637 0.515 0.668 0.555
4750 0 0.504 0.923 0.995 0.881 0.746 0.973 0.897 0.742 0.607 0.494 0.635 0.533
4750 0.5 0.512 0.972 1.012 0.888 0.752 1.008 0.908 0.748 0.614 0.499 0.642 0.539
4750 1 0.517 1.008 1.018 0.886 0.752 1.029 0.911 0.748 0.614 0.499 0.642 0.539
4750 1.5 0.522 1.037 1.020 0.885 0.754 1.044 0.914 0.751 0.618 0.501 0.646 0.542
4750 2 0.526 1.059 1.015 0.882 0.756 1.050 0.912 0.753 0.619 0.503 0.647 0.543
4750 2.5 0.530 1.076 1.011 0.881 0.757 1.054 0.911 0.755 0.621 0.505 0.650 0.544
4750 3 0.534 1.090 1.007 0.882 0.761 1.055 0.912 0.760 0.625 0.508 0.654 0.547
4750 3.5 0.537 1.100 1.001 0.885 0.765 1.053 0.911 0.763 0.627 0.510 0.656 0.548
4750 4 0.538 1.104 0.994 0.887 0.766 1.045 0.909 0.764 0.628 0.511 0.657 0.549
4750 4.5 0.538 1.103 0.986 0.889 0.767 1.034 0.906 0.763 0.629 0.512 0.658 0.550
4750 5 0.535 1.097 0.974 0.888 0.764 1.018 0.899 0.759 0.628 0.511 0.657 0.549
5000 0 0.495 0.854 0.963 0.842 0.704 0.931 0.868 0.702 0.564 0.459 0.591 0.490
5000 0.5 0.502 0.891 0.972 0.844 0.706 0.953 0.874 0.704 0.569 0.463 0.596 0.496
5000 1 0.509 0.925 0.976 0.844 0.709 0.970 0.876 0.707 0.575 0.469 0.602 0.503
5000 1.5 0.514 0.952 0.973 0.841 0.710 0.980 0.875 0.708 0.578 0.471 0.604 0.507
5000 2 0.517 0.973 0.966 0.835 0.708 0.985 0.870 0.706 0.580 0.473 0.605 0.509
5000 2.5 0.523 0.996 0.963 0.834 0.713 0.992 0.869 0.711 0.585 0.477 0.611 0.514
5000 3 0.527 1.013 0.958 0.833 0.715 0.996 0.867 0.714 0.589 0.481 0.615 0.517
5000 3.5 0.532 1.029 0.954 0.835 0.720 0.999 0.867 0.719 0.593 0.484 0.619 0.521
5000 4 0.535 1.039 0.949 0.837 0.724 1.000 0.866 0.723 0.596 0.487 0.623 0.523
5000 4.5 0.537 1.044 0.943 0.839 0.726 0.995 0.864 0.725 0.599 0.489 0.625 0.525
5000 5 0.536 1.044 0.936 0.840 0.727 0.985 0.861 0.726 0.600 0.491 0.627 0.527
5250 0 0.487 0.788 0.926 0.802 0.665 0.893 0.838 0.663 0.525 0.426 0.552 0.449
5250 0.5 0.493 0.817 0.932 0.803 0.668 0.906 0.842 0.666 0.532 0.432 0.558 0.457
5250 1 0.499 0.843 0.930 0.801 0.668 0.913 0.841 0.667 0.536 0.436 0.562 0.464
5250 1.5 0.503 0.868 0.925 0.796 0.668 0.918 0.837 0.667 0.540 0.439 0.565 0.469
5250 2 0.508 0.891 0.919 0.793 0.668 0.923 0.833 0.667 0.544 0.443 0.568 0.475

290
A P P E N D I C E S

Teff g bolo u v b y U B V R I Rc Ic
5250 2.5 0.513 0.914 0.913 0.790 0.670 0.929 0.829 0.669 0.548 0.448 0.573 0.480
5250 3 0.517 0.934 0.906 0.788 0.672 0.934 0.826 0.672 0.553 0.452 0.576 0.485
5250 3.5 0.522 0.954 0.902 0.788 0.676 0.940 0.824 0.676 0.558 0.456 0.582 0.490
5250 4 0.527 0.972 0.900 0.791 0.682 0.946 0.824 0.681 0.563 0.461 0.587 0.495
5250 4.5 0.530 0.982 0.896 0.791 0.684 0.947 0.822 0.684 0.566 0.464 0.590 0.498
5250 5 0.531 0.988 0.891 0.792 0.686 0.945 0.819 0.686 0.568 0.467 0.593 0.500
5500 0 0.546 0.756 0.977 0.861 0.720 0.922 0.901 0.719 0.562 0.453 0.594 0.468
5500 0.5 0.483 0.739 0.894 0.765 0.628 0.857 0.812 0.628 0.493 0.399 0.520 0.418
5500 1 0.487 0.761 0.890 0.762 0.629 0.858 0.810 0.629 0.498 0.403 0.524 0.425
5500 1.5 0.490 0.781 0.881 0.756 0.627 0.857 0.803 0.627 0.501 0.406 0.525 0.430
5500 2 0.494 0.805 0.872 0.751 0.628 0.859 0.796 0.627 0.505 0.410 0.529 0.437
5500 2.5 0.498 0.828 0.862 0.745 0.628 0.861 0.789 0.628 0.510 0.415 0.533 0.444
5500 3 0.505 0.854 0.855 0.744 0.632 0.868 0.785 0.631 0.517 0.422 0.540 0.452
5500 3.5 0.511 0.878 0.851 0.744 0.636 0.877 0.783 0.636 0.524 0.429 0.546 0.459
5500 4 0.517 0.899 0.849 0.746 0.641 0.886 0.782 0.641 0.530 0.434 0.552 0.466
5500 4.5 0.520 0.917 0.847 0.747 0.644 0.893 0.781 0.644 0.533 0.438 0.556 0.470
5500 5 0.522 0.928 0.843 0.746 0.646 0.896 0.778 0.646 0.536 0.441 0.558 0.473
5750 0 0.554 0.700 0.955 0.838 0.701 0.896 0.884 0.701 0.544 0.439 0.576 0.448
5750 0.5 0.554 0.723 0.952 0.837 0.701 0.892 0.883 0.701 0.547 0.439 0.579 0.453
5750 1 0.479 0.691 0.855 0.730 0.599 0.808 0.782 0.599 0.469 0.378 0.494 0.395
5750 1.5 0.483 0.710 0.846 0.725 0.599 0.804 0.776 0.599 0.474 0.382 0.498 0.402
5750 2 0.486 0.732 0.834 0.718 0.598 0.802 0.767 0.598 0.478 0.386 0.501 0.409
5750 2.5 0.489 0.755 0.822 0.711 0.597 0.802 0.758 0.597 0.482 0.390 0.504 0.415
5750 3 0.494 0.780 0.812 0.707 0.597 0.807 0.751 0.598 0.487 0.396 0.509 0.423
5750 3.5 0.500 0.805 0.806 0.705 0.601 0.815 0.747 0.601 0.493 0.402 0.514 0.430
5750 4 0.505 0.829 0.801 0.705 0.605 0.825 0.744 0.604 0.498 0.408 0.520 0.437
5750 4.5 0.510 0.851 0.798 0.705 0.608 0.836 0.742 0.608 0.503 0.413 0.524 0.442
5750 5 0.513 0.867 0.796 0.705 0.610 0.843 0.739 0.610 0.506 0.417 0.527 0.446
6000 0 0.564 0.647 0.951 0.824 0.682 0.884 0.879 0.683 0.527 0.427 0.558 0.430
6000 0.5 0.558 0.667 0.925 0.814 0.683 0.858 0.862 0.683 0.531 0.425 0.562 0.434
6000 1 0.557 0.690 0.916 0.808 0.682 0.848 0.855 0.681 0.534 0.425 0.564 0.439
6000 1.5 0.474 0.645 0.812 0.696 0.571 0.751 0.747 0.572 0.447 0.359 0.471 0.374
6000 2 0.476 0.663 0.800 0.690 0.571 0.745 0.738 0.571 0.451 0.362 0.475 0.381
6000 2.5 0.479 0.685 0.787 0.683 0.569 0.743 0.729 0.570 0.455 0.366 0.477 0.388
6000 3 0.483 0.711 0.775 0.677 0.569 0.746 0.720 0.569 0.460 0.372 0.481 0.396
6000 3.5 0.489 0.737 0.766 0.672 0.570 0.754 0.713 0.571 0.465 0.378 0.486 0.404
6000 4 0.495 0.763 0.759 0.670 0.573 0.764 0.709 0.573 0.471 0.384 0.491 0.411
6000 4.5 0.499 0.787 0.754 0.668 0.575 0.776 0.705 0.575 0.475 0.389 0.494 0.417
6000 5 0.502 0.805 0.750 0.666 0.575 0.786 0.701 0.575 0.477 0.392 0.496 0.420
6250 0.5 0.567 0.618 0.926 0.804 0.667 0.847 0.860 0.668 0.516 0.413 0.546 0.418
6250 1 0.558 0.640 0.889 0.785 0.664 0.813 0.833 0.664 0.519 0.412 0.548 0.423
6250 1.5 0.556 0.664 0.874 0.778 0.661 0.798 0.821 0.661 0.520 0.412 0.549 0.428
6250 2 0.471 0.616 0.772 0.669 0.551 0.701 0.715 0.552 0.432 0.345 0.454 0.360

291
A P P E N D I C E S

Teff g bolo u v b y U B V R I Rc Ic
6250 2.5 0.472 0.629 0.757 0.660 0.548 0.692 0.703 0.549 0.434 0.347 0.456 0.366
6250 3 0.476 0.652 0.744 0.653 0.547 0.692 0.693 0.548 0.438 0.352 0.460 0.374
6250 3.5 0.480 0.677 0.732 0.646 0.546 0.697 0.684 0.547 0.442 0.357 0.462 0.381
6250 4 0.485 0.704 0.723 0.641 0.547 0.708 0.678 0.547 0.447 0.363 0.467 0.388
6250 4.5 0.490 0.729 0.717 0.638 0.548 0.720 0.674 0.548 0.451 0.368 0.470 0.394
6250 5 0.493 0.749 0.710 0.634 0.547 0.732 0.668 0.547 0.452 0.371 0.470 0.397
6500 0.5 0.576 0.579 0.913 0.793 0.654 0.835 0.852 0.657 0.503 0.402 0.533 0.404
6500 1 0.566 0.596 0.891 0.778 0.650 0.800 0.832 0.651 0.504 0.400 0.534 0.407
6500 1.5 0.555 0.619 0.847 0.755 0.644 0.764 0.798 0.644 0.507 0.400 0.535 0.413
6500 2 0.553 0.644 0.829 0.746 0.639 0.749 0.783 0.639 0.507 0.400 0.535 0.418
6500 2.5 0.469 0.596 0.732 0.643 0.532 0.655 0.682 0.533 0.418 0.332 0.440 0.349
6500 3 0.469 0.605 0.715 0.633 0.529 0.646 0.669 0.529 0.419 0.334 0.440 0.354
6500 3.5 0.473 0.628 0.702 0.626 0.528 0.649 0.659 0.528 0.424 0.340 0.444 0.362
6500 4 0.478 0.652 0.691 0.619 0.527 0.657 0.651 0.527 0.428 0.345 0.447 0.369
6500 4.5 0.482 0.675 0.682 0.613 0.525 0.667 0.644 0.526 0.430 0.349 0.449 0.374
6500 5 0.485 0.697 0.674 0.607 0.523 0.679 0.637 0.523 0.431 0.351 0.448 0.377
6750 0.5 0.573 0.552 0.866 0.758 0.634 0.802 0.815 0.637 0.492 0.394 0.520 0.395
6750 1 0.573 0.562 0.879 0.769 0.637 0.789 0.824 0.640 0.491 0.387 0.520 0.393
6750 1.5 0.562 0.581 0.849 0.749 0.630 0.750 0.797 0.631 0.492 0.386 0.520 0.397
6750 2 0.551 0.604 0.801 0.723 0.621 0.715 0.759 0.622 0.493 0.386 0.519 0.403
6750 2.5 0.549 0.629 0.783 0.713 0.616 0.702 0.744 0.617 0.492 0.386 0.518 0.407
6750 3 0.468 0.580 0.691 0.618 0.516 0.615 0.649 0.517 0.407 0.322 0.428 0.341
6750 3.5 0.467 0.588 0.675 0.607 0.511 0.607 0.635 0.512 0.407 0.323 0.427 0.344
6750 4 0.472 0.608 0.663 0.601 0.510 0.612 0.627 0.511 0.411 0.328 0.430 0.351
6750 4.5 0.477 0.630 0.653 0.594 0.509 0.621 0.619 0.509 0.413 0.333 0.432 0.357
6750 5 0.480 0.652 0.644 0.586 0.505 0.634 0.611 0.506 0.414 0.336 0.432 0.361
7000 0.5 0.567 0.537 0.809 0.718 0.612 0.763 0.768 0.615 0.483 0.389 0.509 0.391
7000 1 0.568 0.539 0.835 0.735 0.616 0.760 0.787 0.619 0.479 0.377 0.506 0.383
7000 1.5 0.567 0.552 0.838 0.741 0.617 0.739 0.789 0.620 0.478 0.373 0.506 0.383
7000 2 0.557 0.571 0.805 0.719 0.609 0.700 0.760 0.610 0.478 0.372 0.505 0.387
7000 2.5 0.546 0.594 0.756 0.691 0.599 0.670 0.720 0.600 0.478 0.373 0.503 0.393
7000 3 0.546 0.620 0.738 0.682 0.594 0.661 0.706 0.594 0.477 0.373 0.502 0.397
7000 3.5 0.468 0.568 0.654 0.594 0.500 0.581 0.618 0.501 0.396 0.312 0.416 0.333
7000 4 0.469 0.577 0.639 0.586 0.497 0.578 0.606 0.497 0.397 0.314 0.416 0.337
7000 4.5 0.472 0.593 0.628 0.578 0.494 0.583 0.597 0.494 0.398 0.318 0.417 0.342
7000 5 0.477 0.614 0.618 0.570 0.491 0.595 0.589 0.491 0.401 0.323 0.418 0.348
7250 0.5 0.557 0.533 0.743 0.672 0.589 0.713 0.713 0.590 0.475 0.385 0.499 0.388
7250 1 0.561 0.525 0.784 0.697 0.593 0.727 0.745 0.595 0.466 0.368 0.492 0.375
7250 1.5 0.563 0.531 0.797 0.709 0.596 0.712 0.754 0.599 0.465 0.361 0.491 0.372
7250 2 0.563 0.545 0.797 0.713 0.597 0.690 0.753 0.600 0.465 0.358 0.491 0.373
7250 2.5 0.552 0.565 0.758 0.687 0.586 0.654 0.719 0.588 0.464 0.359 0.489 0.378
7250 3 0.543 0.589 0.712 0.660 0.576 0.631 0.682 0.577 0.463 0.360 0.487 0.383
7250 3.5 0.543 0.614 0.695 0.651 0.571 0.627 0.668 0.571 0.462 0.360 0.485 0.387

292
A P P E N D I C E S

Teff g bolo u v b y U B V R I Rc Ic
7250 4 0.468 0.558 0.618 0.572 0.486 0.553 0.588 0.486 0.386 0.303 0.405 0.326
7250 4.5 0.470 0.566 0.605 0.564 0.482 0.552 0.577 0.482 0.386 0.305 0.404 0.329
7250 5 0.474 0.583 0.594 0.556 0.479 0.562 0.568 0.479 0.388 0.310 0.406 0.335
7500 0.5 0.545 0.538 0.664 0.615 0.560 0.652 0.644 0.560 0.469 0.387 0.490 0.393
7500 1 0.554 0.520 0.731 0.658 0.568 0.691 0.699 0.570 0.454 0.361 0.477 0.368
7500 1.5 0.555 0.518 0.750 0.670 0.570 0.684 0.713 0.572 0.448 0.349 0.473 0.360
7500 2 0.557 0.526 0.757 0.679 0.573 0.665 0.718 0.576 0.448 0.345 0.473 0.359
7500 2.5 0.561 0.540 0.759 0.688 0.578 0.645 0.720 0.580 0.450 0.343 0.475 0.362
7500 3 0.548 0.562 0.711 0.654 0.563 0.611 0.678 0.564 0.449 0.345 0.472 0.369
7500 3.5 0.540 0.586 0.669 0.629 0.554 0.598 0.644 0.554 0.448 0.347 0.470 0.374
7500 4 0.540 0.611 0.655 0.620 0.548 0.599 0.632 0.548 0.446 0.349 0.467 0.378
7500 4.5 0.469 0.549 0.584 0.549 0.470 0.530 0.558 0.471 0.375 0.294 0.393 0.319
7500 5 0.471 0.559 0.572 0.542 0.468 0.534 0.549 0.468 0.376 0.298 0.394 0.323
7750 1 0.551 0.519 0.679 0.620 0.547 0.654 0.654 0.548 0.445 0.357 0.466 0.365
7750 1.5 0.550 0.510 0.704 0.634 0.545 0.655 0.673 0.547 0.434 0.339 0.457 0.351
7750 2 0.551 0.513 0.713 0.642 0.546 0.639 0.679 0.548 0.431 0.331 0.454 0.347
7750 2.5 0.554 0.523 0.716 0.649 0.550 0.619 0.682 0.552 0.430 0.328 0.454 0.347
7750 3 0.559 0.538 0.717 0.657 0.555 0.602 0.682 0.557 0.433 0.328 0.456 0.351
7750 3.5 0.565 0.555 0.714 0.664 0.560 0.588 0.681 0.562 0.436 0.329 0.460 0.355
7750 4 0.538 0.585 0.629 0.599 0.531 0.571 0.608 0.531 0.432 0.335 0.453 0.365
7750 4.5 0.472 0.542 0.566 0.537 0.462 0.516 0.543 0.463 0.368 0.287 0.386 0.312
7750 5 0.472 0.546 0.552 0.529 0.458 0.515 0.532 0.457 0.367 0.289 0.384 0.314
8000 1 0.555 0.523 0.637 0.588 0.527 0.621 0.616 0.528 0.439 0.358 0.458 0.367
8000 1.5 0.552 0.504 0.664 0.604 0.525 0.628 0.638 0.527 0.424 0.333 0.445 0.345
8000 2 0.550 0.502 0.674 0.610 0.523 0.616 0.644 0.525 0.416 0.321 0.438 0.337
8000 2.5 0.551 0.508 0.678 0.615 0.525 0.598 0.647 0.527 0.414 0.316 0.436 0.335
8000 3 0.554 0.520 0.678 0.621 0.528 0.579 0.647 0.530 0.414 0.314 0.437 0.337
8000 3.5 0.554 0.536 0.666 0.619 0.527 0.560 0.636 0.529 0.416 0.315 0.438 0.342
8000 4 0.541 0.560 0.618 0.588 0.517 0.548 0.596 0.517 0.418 0.321 0.438 0.350
8000 4.5 0.536 0.584 0.592 0.571 0.509 0.552 0.575 0.509 0.417 0.325 0.436 0.356
8000 5 0.477 0.542 0.535 0.518 0.450 0.504 0.518 0.450 0.361 0.283 0.378 0.309
8250 1 0.567 0.539 0.611 0.567 0.511 0.602 0.592 0.512 0.435 0.363 0.451 0.371
8250 1.5 0.560 0.502 0.632 0.579 0.509 0.605 0.609 0.510 0.416 0.331 0.436 0.342
8250 2 0.555 0.492 0.640 0.583 0.504 0.595 0.614 0.506 0.405 0.314 0.425 0.329
8250 2.5 0.554 0.493 0.643 0.585 0.503 0.578 0.616 0.505 0.400 0.305 0.420 0.324
8250 3 0.555 0.502 0.644 0.590 0.505 0.559 0.616 0.506 0.399 0.301 0.419 0.324
8250 3.5 0.558 0.515 0.643 0.597 0.509 0.542 0.615 0.510 0.400 0.301 0.421 0.327
8250 4 0.555 0.534 0.623 0.588 0.506 0.530 0.598 0.507 0.402 0.305 0.423 0.334
8250 4.5 0.539 0.560 0.576 0.557 0.495 0.528 0.560 0.495 0.404 0.311 0.422 0.343
8250 5 0.533 0.584 0.556 0.543 0.488 0.537 0.543 0.488 0.402 0.315 0.420 0.347
8500 1 0.582 0.565 0.598 0.559 0.505 0.596 0.581 0.506 0.433 0.370 0.449 0.376
8500 1.5 0.572 0.507 0.608 0.560 0.495 0.587 0.587 0.497 0.411 0.331 0.429 0.342
8500 2 0.567 0.488 0.613 0.561 0.490 0.577 0.590 0.491 0.397 0.310 0.416 0.324

293
A P P E N D I C E S

Teff g bolo u v b y U B V R I Rc Ic
8500 2.5 0.564 0.482 0.615 0.561 0.485 0.560 0.590 0.487 0.389 0.298 0.409 0.317
8500 3 0.562 0.486 0.615 0.563 0.484 0.542 0.589 0.486 0.385 0.292 0.405 0.314
8500 3.5 0.563 0.496 0.613 0.568 0.487 0.525 0.587 0.488 0.385 0.289 0.405 0.315
8500 4 0.565 0.511 0.609 0.573 0.491 0.512 0.584 0.492 0.386 0.290 0.406 0.318
8500 4.5 0.555 0.533 0.578 0.556 0.485 0.506 0.559 0.485 0.389 0.295 0.407 0.326
8500 5 0.536 0.561 0.537 0.528 0.474 0.515 0.526 0.474 0.390 0.303 0.407 0.335
8750 1.5 0.583 0.517 0.592 0.547 0.485 0.576 0.572 0.487 0.406 0.331 0.424 0.341
8750 2 0.580 0.490 0.592 0.544 0.476 0.562 0.571 0.478 0.391 0.308 0.409 0.322
8750 2.5 0.577 0.478 0.591 0.542 0.471 0.547 0.569 0.472 0.381 0.294 0.399 0.311
8750 3 0.575 0.477 0.590 0.542 0.468 0.529 0.566 0.469 0.375 0.285 0.393 0.306
8750 3.5 0.575 0.482 0.588 0.544 0.469 0.511 0.564 0.470 0.372 0.280 0.391 0.305
8750 4 0.574 0.492 0.584 0.549 0.471 0.496 0.561 0.473 0.373 0.278 0.392 0.307
8750 4.5 0.573 0.508 0.573 0.551 0.474 0.487 0.553 0.474 0.374 0.280 0.393 0.311
8750 5 0.551 0.536 0.532 0.523 0.464 0.492 0.519 0.464 0.377 0.289 0.394 0.321
9000 1.5 0.593 0.526 0.581 0.538 0.478 0.567 0.562 0.479 0.402 0.332 0.419 0.341
9000 2 0.591 0.494 0.575 0.530 0.466 0.551 0.556 0.467 0.385 0.306 0.402 0.320
9000 2.5 0.591 0.479 0.572 0.526 0.459 0.535 0.551 0.461 0.374 0.291 0.392 0.307
9000 3 0.590 0.472 0.569 0.524 0.455 0.518 0.547 0.456 0.367 0.280 0.385 0.301
9000 3.5 0.589 0.473 0.566 0.524 0.454 0.500 0.544 0.455 0.363 0.274 0.381 0.298
9000 4 0.588 0.480 0.562 0.527 0.455 0.484 0.540 0.456 0.361 0.270 0.379 0.298
9000 4.5 0.587 0.491 0.556 0.531 0.459 0.473 0.536 0.459 0.362 0.270 0.380 0.300
9000 5 0.588 0.505 0.547 0.539 0.465 0.471 0.532 0.465 0.365 0.272 0.383 0.304
9250 2 0.601 0.499 0.562 0.519 0.457 0.541 0.543 0.458 0.380 0.304 0.397 0.317
9250 2.5 0.602 0.480 0.556 0.513 0.449 0.525 0.537 0.450 0.369 0.288 0.385 0.304
9250 3 0.603 0.471 0.552 0.510 0.444 0.509 0.532 0.445 0.361 0.277 0.378 0.297
9250 3.5 0.603 0.469 0.548 0.508 0.441 0.493 0.527 0.442 0.355 0.269 0.372 0.293
9250 4 0.603 0.472 0.544 0.509 0.441 0.476 0.523 0.442 0.353 0.265 0.370 0.292
9250 4.5 0.601 0.479 0.537 0.511 0.443 0.463 0.518 0.443 0.352 0.263 0.369 0.292
9250 5 0.600 0.490 0.528 0.517 0.448 0.457 0.513 0.448 0.353 0.263 0.371 0.295
9500 2 0.608 0.502 0.551 0.509 0.449 0.533 0.532 0.450 0.375 0.302 0.390 0.314
9500 2.5 0.612 0.482 0.542 0.502 0.440 0.516 0.524 0.441 0.363 0.285 0.379 0.301
9500 3 0.614 0.472 0.537 0.497 0.434 0.501 0.518 0.435 0.355 0.274 0.371 0.293
9500 3.5 0.616 0.467 0.532 0.495 0.431 0.486 0.513 0.432 0.349 0.266 0.366 0.288
9500 4 0.616 0.467 0.528 0.494 0.429 0.471 0.509 0.430 0.345 0.261 0.362 0.286
9500 4.5 0.616 0.472 0.521 0.495 0.430 0.456 0.503 0.431 0.344 0.257 0.360 0.286
9500 5 0.614 0.480 0.511 0.498 0.433 0.447 0.496 0.433 0.343 0.256 0.360 0.287
9750 2 0.614 0.501 0.541 0.501 0.441 0.524 0.523 0.442 0.369 0.299 0.384 0.310
9750 2.5 0.619 0.483 0.530 0.491 0.431 0.507 0.512 0.432 0.357 0.282 0.372 0.297
9750 3 0.623 0.472 0.523 0.486 0.425 0.493 0.505 0.426 0.349 0.271 0.365 0.289
9750 3.5 0.627 0.466 0.519 0.483 0.422 0.479 0.501 0.423 0.343 0.263 0.359 0.284
9750 4 0.628 0.465 0.514 0.481 0.420 0.465 0.496 0.421 0.339 0.257 0.355 0.282
9750 4.5 0.628 0.467 0.508 0.481 0.419 0.451 0.490 0.420 0.337 0.253 0.353 0.281
9750 5 0.627 0.472 0.498 0.483 0.421 0.440 0.483 0.421 0.336 0.251 0.352 0.281

294
A P P E N D I C E S

Teff g bolo u v b y U B V R I Rc Ic
10000 2 0.618 0.497 0.533 0.492 0.434 0.516 0.514 0.435 0.363 0.295 0.378 0.306
10000 2.5 0.625 0.482 0.520 0.481 0.422 0.499 0.502 0.424 0.351 0.278 0.366 0.292
10000 3 0.631 0.471 0.511 0.475 0.416 0.485 0.494 0.417 0.343 0.267 0.358 0.285
10000 3.5 0.635 0.465 0.505 0.472 0.412 0.472 0.488 0.414 0.338 0.259 0.353 0.280
10000 4 0.638 0.462 0.501 0.471 0.411 0.459 0.484 0.412 0.334 0.253 0.349 0.278
10000 4.5 0.639 0.463 0.495 0.470 0.410 0.447 0.478 0.411 0.331 0.249 0.346 0.277
10000 5 0.638 0.467 0.486 0.470 0.411 0.436 0.471 0.411 0.329 0.247 0.345 0.277
10500 2 0.624 0.484 0.518 0.478 0.421 0.500 0.500 0.423 0.352 0.288 0.367 0.297
10500 2.5 0.634 0.474 0.501 0.464 0.407 0.482 0.484 0.408 0.338 0.270 0.353 0.283
10500 3 0.642 0.467 0.490 0.456 0.400 0.469 0.474 0.401 0.331 0.260 0.345 0.276
10500 3.5 0.649 0.461 0.483 0.453 0.396 0.458 0.468 0.398 0.327 0.253 0.341 0.272
10500 4 0.653 0.458 0.478 0.450 0.394 0.448 0.463 0.395 0.323 0.247 0.338 0.270
10500 4.5 0.655 0.458 0.473 0.449 0.393 0.439 0.458 0.394 0.320 0.244 0.335 0.269
10500 5 0.656 0.459 0.465 0.448 0.393 0.429 0.451 0.393 0.318 0.241 0.332 0.268
11000 2.5 0.640 0.460 0.486 0.450 0.394 0.466 0.469 0.395 0.327 0.261 0.341 0.273
11000 3 0.650 0.456 0.472 0.440 0.385 0.453 0.457 0.386 0.319 0.251 0.333 0.266
11000 3.5 0.658 0.454 0.464 0.435 0.381 0.444 0.449 0.383 0.315 0.245 0.329 0.264
11000 4 0.664 0.452 0.458 0.433 0.380 0.436 0.444 0.381 0.313 0.241 0.327 0.262
11000 4.5 0.668 0.451 0.453 0.432 0.379 0.429 0.440 0.380 0.311 0.238 0.324 0.261
11000 5 0.670 0.452 0.447 0.430 0.378 0.421 0.434 0.379 0.309 0.235 0.322 0.261
11500 2.5 0.646 0.446 0.473 0.438 0.383 0.452 0.457 0.384 0.317 0.254 0.330 0.265
11500 3 0.656 0.443 0.457 0.426 0.372 0.438 0.442 0.373 0.308 0.242 0.321 0.257
11500 3.5 0.665 0.442 0.448 0.420 0.368 0.429 0.433 0.369 0.304 0.236 0.317 0.254
11500 4 0.672 0.443 0.441 0.418 0.366 0.423 0.428 0.367 0.302 0.233 0.315 0.253
11500 4.5 0.677 0.443 0.436 0.417 0.366 0.417 0.423 0.367 0.301 0.231 0.314 0.254
11500 5 0.680 0.445 0.430 0.415 0.366 0.413 0.418 0.366 0.300 0.229 0.313 0.253
12000 2.5 0.652 0.435 0.463 0.428 0.374 0.441 0.447 0.376 0.310 0.248 0.323 0.259
12000 3 0.663 0.429 0.445 0.414 0.361 0.425 0.429 0.362 0.298 0.235 0.311 0.248
12000 3.5 0.671 0.429 0.433 0.406 0.355 0.415 0.419 0.356 0.293 0.228 0.306 0.245
12000 4 0.679 0.431 0.426 0.403 0.353 0.409 0.413 0.354 0.292 0.225 0.304 0.245
12000 4.5 0.684 0.433 0.420 0.402 0.353 0.405 0.408 0.354 0.291 0.224 0.304 0.246
12000 5 0.688 0.435 0.415 0.402 0.354 0.402 0.404 0.354 0.291 0.223 0.303 0.246
12500 2.5 0.657 0.426 0.456 0.421 0.368 0.433 0.440 0.369 0.304 0.244 0.317 0.254
12500 3 0.668 0.417 0.434 0.404 0.352 0.414 0.419 0.353 0.290 0.228 0.302 0.241
12500 3.5 0.677 0.416 0.421 0.395 0.345 0.403 0.407 0.346 0.284 0.221 0.296 0.237
12500 4 0.684 0.418 0.413 0.390 0.342 0.397 0.400 0.343 0.282 0.218 0.294 0.236
12500 4.5 0.690 0.422 0.407 0.389 0.342 0.394 0.395 0.343 0.282 0.217 0.294 0.238
12500 5 0.694 0.426 0.401 0.389 0.343 0.392 0.391 0.343 0.282 0.216 0.294 0.239
13000 2.5 0.661 0.420 0.450 0.415 0.363 0.427 0.434 0.364 0.300 0.241 0.313 0.251
13000 3 0.674 0.408 0.426 0.395 0.345 0.405 0.411 0.346 0.284 0.224 0.296 0.236
13000 3.5 0.683 0.405 0.411 0.385 0.335 0.392 0.397 0.337 0.276 0.215 0.288 0.230
13000 4 0.690 0.407 0.401 0.379 0.332 0.386 0.389 0.333 0.273 0.211 0.285 0.229
13000 4.5 0.695 0.411 0.395 0.378 0.331 0.382 0.383 0.332 0.273 0.210 0.284 0.230

295
A P P E N D I C E S

Teff g bolo u v b y U B V R I Rc Ic
13000 5 0.699 0.415 0.389 0.378 0.332 0.381 0.379 0.333 0.273 0.210 0.285 0.232
14000 2 0.644 0.453 0.483 0.450 0.401 0.464 0.468 0.402 0.339 0.283 0.351 0.289
14000 2.5 0.666 0.414 0.441 0.408 0.356 0.419 0.426 0.358 0.296 0.238 0.308 0.247
14000 3 0.682 0.396 0.413 0.383 0.333 0.392 0.398 0.335 0.274 0.216 0.286 0.228
14000 3.5 0.692 0.388 0.395 0.369 0.321 0.376 0.381 0.322 0.264 0.205 0.275 0.220
14000 4 0.699 0.387 0.383 0.361 0.315 0.367 0.370 0.316 0.259 0.200 0.270 0.217
14000 4.5 0.703 0.390 0.374 0.358 0.313 0.363 0.363 0.314 0.258 0.198 0.269 0.217
14000 5 0.707 0.395 0.368 0.357 0.314 0.362 0.358 0.314 0.258 0.198 0.269 0.218
15000 2.5 0.667 0.412 0.436 0.404 0.354 0.416 0.421 0.355 0.294 0.238 0.306 0.247
15000 3 0.686 0.388 0.404 0.374 0.326 0.385 0.390 0.328 0.269 0.212 0.280 0.224
15000 3.5 0.698 0.377 0.383 0.357 0.311 0.365 0.370 0.312 0.255 0.199 0.266 0.213
15000 4 0.705 0.373 0.369 0.348 0.303 0.354 0.357 0.304 0.249 0.192 0.259 0.208
15000 4.5 0.710 0.373 0.359 0.343 0.300 0.348 0.348 0.301 0.246 0.189 0.256 0.206
15000 5 0.712 0.377 0.351 0.341 0.299 0.346 0.342 0.300 0.245 0.188 0.256 0.207
16000 2.5 0.663 0.413 0.432 0.402 0.354 0.416 0.419 0.356 0.296 0.240 0.307 0.249
16000 3 0.686 0.384 0.397 0.368 0.322 0.380 0.383 0.323 0.265 0.210 0.276 0.221
16000 3.5 0.701 0.369 0.374 0.349 0.304 0.358 0.361 0.305 0.249 0.194 0.260 0.208
16000 4 0.709 0.363 0.358 0.338 0.294 0.345 0.346 0.295 0.241 0.186 0.251 0.201
16000 4.5 0.714 0.361 0.347 0.331 0.289 0.337 0.336 0.290 0.237 0.182 0.247 0.199
16000 5 0.717 0.363 0.338 0.328 0.288 0.334 0.329 0.288 0.235 0.181 0.245 0.199
17000 2.5 0.656 0.416 0.430 0.401 0.356 0.417 0.417 0.358 0.300 0.245 0.311 0.254
17000 3 0.683 0.381 0.391 0.364 0.319 0.377 0.378 0.320 0.263 0.209 0.274 0.220
17000 3.5 0.700 0.364 0.366 0.342 0.298 0.353 0.354 0.299 0.245 0.191 0.255 0.204
17000 4 0.710 0.355 0.349 0.329 0.287 0.338 0.338 0.288 0.235 0.182 0.245 0.196
17000 4.5 0.716 0.352 0.337 0.322 0.281 0.329 0.327 0.282 0.230 0.177 0.240 0.193
17000 5 0.719 0.352 0.327 0.318 0.278 0.324 0.318 0.279 0.228 0.175 0.237 0.192
18000 2.5 0.647 0.419 0.428 0.400 0.359 0.419 0.416 0.360 0.305 0.252 0.316 0.261
18000 3 0.677 0.380 0.386 0.360 0.317 0.375 0.374 0.318 0.263 0.209 0.273 0.220
18000 3.5 0.697 0.360 0.360 0.336 0.294 0.348 0.348 0.295 0.242 0.189 0.252 0.202
18000 4 0.709 0.349 0.342 0.322 0.281 0.332 0.331 0.282 0.230 0.178 0.240 0.192
18000 4.5 0.716 0.344 0.329 0.314 0.274 0.322 0.319 0.275 0.224 0.173 0.234 0.188
18000 5 0.719 0.343 0.319 0.309 0.271 0.317 0.310 0.271 0.221 0.170 0.231 0.187
19000 2.5 0.636 0.419 0.427 0.400 0.362 0.419 0.416 0.363 0.310 0.259 0.320 0.268
19000 3 0.669 0.379 0.381 0.356 0.315 0.373 0.369 0.316 0.263 0.211 0.273 0.222
19000 3.5 0.691 0.356 0.353 0.331 0.290 0.345 0.342 0.291 0.239 0.188 0.249 0.200
19000 4 0.706 0.344 0.335 0.316 0.277 0.328 0.324 0.277 0.227 0.176 0.236 0.189
19000 4.5 0.714 0.338 0.322 0.307 0.269 0.317 0.312 0.269 0.220 0.169 0.229 0.184
19000 5 0.718 0.336 0.311 0.301 0.265 0.311 0.302 0.265 0.216 0.166 0.225 0.182
20000 3 0.659 0.376 0.376 0.351 0.313 0.370 0.365 0.314 0.263 0.213 0.273 0.223
20000 3.5 0.684 0.353 0.347 0.325 0.287 0.342 0.336 0.288 0.238 0.187 0.247 0.200
20000 4 0.700 0.340 0.328 0.310 0.272 0.323 0.318 0.273 0.223 0.174 0.233 0.187
20000 4.5 0.709 0.333 0.315 0.300 0.264 0.312 0.305 0.264 0.216 0.167 0.225 0.181
20000 5 0.714 0.330 0.304 0.295 0.259 0.306 0.296 0.259 0.212 0.163 0.220 0.179

296
A P P E N D I C E S

Teff g bolo u v b y U B V R I Rc Ic
21000 3 0.648 0.371 0.372 0.347 0.310 0.366 0.361 0.311 0.262 0.213 0.271 0.224
21000 3.5 0.675 0.349 0.340 0.319 0.283 0.338 0.330 0.284 0.236 0.187 0.245 0.199
21000 4 0.692 0.336 0.322 0.304 0.268 0.319 0.312 0.269 0.221 0.173 0.230 0.186
21000 4.5 0.703 0.328 0.309 0.295 0.259 0.308 0.300 0.260 0.212 0.165 0.221 0.179
21000 5 0.709 0.324 0.298 0.289 0.254 0.302 0.290 0.254 0.208 0.161 0.216 0.176
22000 3 0.636 0.366 0.370 0.345 0.308 0.362 0.359 0.309 0.261 0.213 0.270 0.224
22000 3.5 0.664 0.343 0.334 0.313 0.278 0.332 0.324 0.279 0.233 0.186 0.241 0.198
22000 4 0.683 0.331 0.315 0.297 0.263 0.315 0.305 0.264 0.218 0.171 0.227 0.184
22000 4.5 0.695 0.324 0.302 0.289 0.255 0.304 0.293 0.255 0.210 0.163 0.218 0.177
22000 5 0.701 0.319 0.292 0.283 0.250 0.297 0.284 0.250 0.205 0.159 0.213 0.173
23000 3 0.623 0.364 0.372 0.346 0.310 0.363 0.361 0.312 0.263 0.215 0.272 0.225
23000 3.5 0.652 0.336 0.329 0.308 0.273 0.326 0.319 0.274 0.229 0.184 0.238 0.196
23000 4 0.672 0.325 0.308 0.291 0.258 0.309 0.299 0.258 0.215 0.170 0.223 0.182
23000 4.5 0.685 0.319 0.295 0.282 0.250 0.300 0.287 0.250 0.207 0.162 0.215 0.175
23000 5 0.692 0.315 0.286 0.277 0.245 0.293 0.278 0.245 0.202 0.157 0.210 0.171
24000 3 0.609 0.369 0.377 0.351 0.316 0.368 0.366 0.318 0.269 0.220 0.278 0.231
24000 3.5 0.639 0.331 0.326 0.304 0.270 0.322 0.316 0.271 0.227 0.183 0.235 0.194
24000 4 0.660 0.318 0.302 0.284 0.252 0.304 0.293 0.253 0.211 0.168 0.219 0.180
24000 4.5 0.673 0.313 0.289 0.276 0.245 0.294 0.281 0.245 0.203 0.160 0.211 0.173
24000 5 0.681 0.310 0.280 0.271 0.241 0.289 0.272 0.241 0.199 0.156 0.206 0.169
25000 3 0.592 0.376 0.381 0.355 0.324 0.374 0.371 0.325 0.277 0.229 0.286 0.239
25000 3.5 0.625 0.329 0.326 0.303 0.270 0.321 0.316 0.271 0.227 0.182 0.235 0.193
25000 4 0.646 0.311 0.297 0.279 0.248 0.298 0.288 0.249 0.208 0.166 0.215 0.177
25000 4.5 0.660 0.306 0.283 0.269 0.239 0.289 0.274 0.240 0.200 0.158 0.207 0.171
25000 5 0.668 0.304 0.273 0.265 0.236 0.284 0.266 0.236 0.196 0.154 0.203 0.167
26000 3 0.576 0.379 0.383 0.358 0.330 0.377 0.373 0.331 0.285 0.238 0.294 0.248
26000 3.5 0.609 0.330 0.327 0.304 0.272 0.323 0.317 0.273 0.229 0.184 0.237 0.195
26000 4 0.630 0.307 0.295 0.276 0.245 0.295 0.285 0.246 0.205 0.164 0.213 0.176
26000 4.5 0.644 0.300 0.277 0.264 0.235 0.283 0.269 0.235 0.196 0.156 0.203 0.168
26000 5 0.653 0.298 0.267 0.259 0.231 0.279 0.260 0.231 0.192 0.153 0.199 0.165
27000 3.5 0.591 0.332 0.328 0.304 0.274 0.325 0.318 0.275 0.232 0.188 0.240 0.199
27000 4 0.613 0.305 0.294 0.274 0.245 0.294 0.284 0.245 0.205 0.164 0.212 0.175
27000 4.5 0.627 0.294 0.274 0.259 0.231 0.279 0.265 0.232 0.193 0.154 0.200 0.166
27000 5 0.636 0.292 0.262 0.252 0.226 0.274 0.255 0.226 0.189 0.151 0.195 0.163
28000 3.5 0.574 0.332 0.326 0.303 0.275 0.324 0.316 0.276 0.234 0.191 0.242 0.201
28000 4 0.595 0.305 0.292 0.273 0.244 0.293 0.283 0.245 0.205 0.165 0.212 0.176
28000 4.5 0.608 0.291 0.271 0.256 0.228 0.276 0.263 0.229 0.191 0.153 0.198 0.165
28000 5 0.617 0.286 0.258 0.248 0.222 0.269 0.251 0.222 0.186 0.149 0.192 0.160
29000 3.5 0.561 0.328 0.322 0.299 0.273 0.321 0.313 0.274 0.234 0.192 0.242 0.202
29000 4 0.576 0.303 0.290 0.270 0.243 0.292 0.281 0.244 0.205 0.166 0.212 0.177
29000 4.5 0.589 0.288 0.268 0.253 0.227 0.274 0.260 0.227 0.190 0.153 0.197 0.164
29000 5 0.597 0.282 0.254 0.244 0.218 0.265 0.247 0.219 0.183 0.147 0.190 0.159
30000 3.5 0.555 0.321 0.317 0.294 0.270 0.316 0.308 0.271 0.233 0.192 0.241 0.202

297
A P P E N D I C E S

Teff g bolo u v b y U B V R I Rc Ic
30000 4 0.559 0.300 0.285 0.266 0.241 0.289 0.277 0.242 0.205 0.166 0.211 0.176
30000 4.5 0.569 0.286 0.265 0.249 0.224 0.272 0.257 0.225 0.189 0.152 0.196 0.163
30000 5 0.577 0.277 0.251 0.240 0.215 0.262 0.244 0.216 0.181 0.146 0.187 0.157
31000 3.5 0.553 0.315 0.313 0.289 0.266 0.310 0.304 0.267 0.231 0.192 0.238 0.201
31000 4 0.548 0.293 0.279 0.260 0.236 0.283 0.271 0.238 0.202 0.164 0.209 0.175
31000 4.5 0.552 0.281 0.260 0.244 0.221 0.267 0.252 0.222 0.187 0.151 0.194 0.162
31000 5 0.557 0.273 0.246 0.235 0.212 0.258 0.239 0.212 0.179 0.144 0.185 0.155
32000 4 0.541 0.285 0.271 0.252 0.231 0.275 0.263 0.232 0.199 0.162 0.205 0.172
32000 4.5 0.539 0.274 0.253 0.238 0.216 0.262 0.246 0.217 0.184 0.149 0.190 0.159
32000 5 0.540 0.267 0.241 0.230 0.207 0.253 0.234 0.208 0.176 0.142 0.182 0.153
33000 4 0.537 0.276 0.263 0.245 0.224 0.267 0.256 0.226 0.195 0.159 0.201 0.168
33000 4.5 0.529 0.266 0.245 0.231 0.211 0.254 0.238 0.212 0.181 0.146 0.186 0.156
33000 5 0.527 0.260 0.234 0.222 0.203 0.246 0.228 0.204 0.172 0.139 0.178 0.150
34000 4 0.537 0.267 0.257 0.238 0.218 0.259 0.249 0.219 0.189 0.155 0.195 0.164
34000 4.5 0.524 0.257 0.237 0.222 0.204 0.246 0.230 0.205 0.176 0.143 0.181 0.152
34000 5 0.517 0.252 0.226 0.215 0.197 0.239 0.220 0.198 0.168 0.136 0.174 0.146
35000 4 0.541 0.260 0.252 0.232 0.212 0.253 0.244 0.213 0.184 0.150 0.189 0.159
35000 4.5 0.521 0.247 0.228 0.214 0.196 0.236 0.222 0.197 0.170 0.138 0.175 0.147
35000 5 0.512 0.243 0.218 0.207 0.190 0.231 0.212 0.191 0.163 0.132 0.168 0.142
37500 4.5 0.534 0.225 0.212 0.197 0.179 0.217 0.206 0.180 0.155 0.125 0.160 0.133
37500 5 0.512 0.218 0.197 0.186 0.171 0.208 0.192 0.172 0.148 0.119 0.152 0.128
40000 4.5 0.565 0.217 0.207 0.191 0.172 0.209 0.200 0.173 0.148 0.118 0.152 0.125
40000 5 0.539 0.201 0.184 0.172 0.157 0.192 0.179 0.158 0.135 0.107 0.139 0.115
42500 5 0.569 0.193 0.178 0.166 0.150 0.185 0.173 0.151 0.128 0.102 0.133 0.109
45000 5 0.588 0.189 0.175 0.163 0.146 0.181 0.169 0.148 0.126 0.099 0.130 0.106
47500 5 0.604 0.185 0.172 0.160 0.143 0.178 0.166 0.145 0.123 0.097 0.127 0.103
50000 5 0.616 0.182 0.169 0.157 0.140 0.175 0.164 0.142 0.121 0.096 0.125 0.102

298
A P P E N D I C E S

Technical Support

If you are having problems with the program, the best way to contact the authors
is to send an email to David Bradstreet at
dbradstr@[Link]
Updates for the program will be available at [Link]
Additional binary system zip files will be available at the Catalog and Atlas of
Eclipsing Binaries at [Link]
Written inquiries can be sent to:
Contact Software
725 Stanbridge St.
Norristown, PA 19401-5505
USA

Limitations
Binary Maker 3 has the following limitations:
1. It does not automatically iterate to a best-fit solution. Future updates may
include this feature.
2. Use of the Radius Input mode when defining overcontact binaries will
probably cause spurious results because exactly the correct radii would
have to be input in order to create identical equipotentials for both stars.
In other words, don't use Radius Input mode for overcontact systems.
3. Light calculations are made using the Planck black body radiation law.
Future updates may include model atmospheres.
4. Asynchronous rotation and eccentric orbit calculations must be performed
in spherical coordinates geometry mode (the default mode), not cylindrical
coordinates. This shouldn’t pose any problems because cylindrical
coordinates are usually only used for overcontact systems, which possess
circular orbits and are synchronously rotating.

299
A P P E N D I C E S

Errors

Despite our best intentions and diligence, errors are inevitable with a program of
this magnitude of complexity. We would greatly appreciate hearing about any
problems that you have with the program so that we can attempt to correct them
and produce updated versions of the program that will be available online. Errors
can be reported to David Bradstreet at dbradstr@[Link].
Many of the errors that the user will encounter will be due to the input of
parameters that produce unphysical models, usually resulting in Newton-Raphson
iterating problems and non-convergence to a solution. If this occurs an error
dialog will appear as shown below:

Figure A.2 - Newton-Raphson convergence error, usually due to unphysical

parameters
Entering unphysical parameters will result in the following error message:

Figure A.2 - NonPhysical Parameter error message

Other types of input errors will occur is you enter values that are beyond the
"practical" range of those parameters. For example, limb darkening values are
expected to be between 0.0 and 3.0, and if you enter values outside of that range
the following error dialog appears:

300
A P P E N D I C E S

Figure A.3 - Limb darkening error dialog

Most of the other input parameters also have limiting ranges. These ranges are:

Parameter Limits

latitude grid >0

longitude grid >0

mass ratio >0

omega potential > 0 or = -1

C potential > 0 or = -1

radius input > 0 or = -1

fillout -1.0 <= f <= +1.0

effective wavelength 1000 Å < lambda < 10000 Å

effective temperature 200 °K < T < 1000000 °K

reflection coefficient 0 <= A <= 3.0

third light (L3) >=0

gravity brightening 0<= g < = 3.0

limb darkening 0 <= x <= 3.0

inclination 0° <= i <= 180°

normalization phase 0 <= norm phase <= 1.0

301
A P P E N D I C E S

normalization factor Any number

phase increment 0 < phase incr <= 1.00

spot colatitude 0° <= colatitude <= 180°

spot longitude 0° <= longitude <= 360°

spot radius 0° <= radius <= 180°

spot temperature factor >= 0

eccentricity 0 <= e < 1.0

rotation parameter F >= 0

argument of periastron 0° <= omega <= 360°

zero point of phase -1.0 <= zero point <= +1.0

period (days) >0

velocity semiamplitude K Any number

systemic velocity Vo Any number

disk cutoff latitude an integer <= latitude grid size

302
A P P E N D I C E S

Sample BM3 parameter File

(Sample file for VZ Psc, V filter, parameters taken from Hrivnak et al. (1995))
Note that the order of the parameters in the file does not matter because each is
“tagged” with an identifying label.
GEOMETRY=SPHERICAL
LATITUDE_GRID=20
LONGITUDE_GRID=40
MASS_RATIO=0.800000
INPUT_MODE=OMEGA_POTENTIALS
OMEGA_1=-1.000000
OMEGA_2=3.440000
WAVELENGTH=5500.000000
TEMPERATURE_1=4500.000000
TEMPERATURE_2=4110.000000
GRAVITY_1=0.320000
GRAVITY_2=0.320000
LIMB_1=0.830000
LIMB_2=0.830000
REFLECTION_1=0.500000
REFLECTION_2=0.500000
THIRD_LIGHT=0.000000
INCLINATION=48.000000
NORM_PHASE=0.250000
PHASE_INCREMENT=0.005000
HAS_SPOTS=TRUE
NUM_SPOTS=2
SPH_SPOT_0_CO_LATITUDE=90.000000
SPH_SPOT_0_LONGITUDE=299.000000
SPH_SPOT_0_RADIUS=32.000000
SPH_SPOT_0_TEMP_FACTOR=1.200000
SPH_SPOT_0_STAR_NUM=2
SPH_SPOT_0_ORBIT_SYNC=FALSE
SPH_SPOT_1_CO_LATITUDE=90.000000
SPH_SPOT_1_LONGITUDE=57.000000
SPH_SPOT_1_RADIUS=29.000000
SPH_SPOT_1_TEMP_FACTOR=1.200000
SPH_SPOT_1_STAR_NUM=2
SPH_SPOT_1_ORBIT_SYNC=FALSE
HAS_DISK=FALSE
ROTATION_F1=1.0
ROTATION_F2=1.0
PSEUDOSYNC=TRUE
LONG_OF_PERIASTRON=0.000000
ECCENTRICITY=0.0
ZERO_POINT_OF_PHASE=0.0
USER_NORM_FACTOR=1.0

303
A P P E N D I C E S

Sample BM3 nrm file

(Sample nrm file for VZ Psc (partial content to illustrate format), V filter, data
from Samec (1989))
The data is presented as

phase flux

0.0024 0.8136
0.0063 0.8009
0.0113 0.8038
0.0114 0.8187
0.0150 0.8077
0.0186 0.8289
0.0230 0.8104
0.0272 0.8176
0.0307 0.8212
0.0360 0.8213
…
…
0.9696 0.8049
0.9717 0.8225
0.9734 0.8101
0.9752 0.8063
0.9772 0.8131
0.9810 0.8034
0.9848 0.8094
0.9886 0.8023
0.9913 0.8193
0.9923 0.7976
0.9954 0.8122
0.9988 0.8079

304
A P P E N D I C E S

BM3 Sample rv file

(Sample file (not including all the data) for VZ Psc, V filter, parameters taken
from Hrivnak et al. (1995))
The first line contains the period of the binary in days, the second line has the velocity
semiamplitude for star 1 (more massive star) and star 2 (less massive star), and the third
line contains the systemic velocity of the system, all in km/s. The format of the
velocity data itself is

Star number phase radial velocity (km/s)

0.26125902
125.0 156.2
-12.2
1 0.186 -133.
1 0.259 -125.
1 0.323 -124.
1 0.380 -104.
1 0.650 80.
1 0.753 84.
1 0.785 88.
1 0.818 84.
1 0.854 67.
…
…
1 0.318 -113.
1 0.336 -90.
1 0.204 -127.
1 0.228 -136.
1 0.253 -142.
2 0.186 118.
2 0.259 152.
2 0.323 130.
2 0.380 123.
2 0.650 -153.
2 0.753 -156.
…
…
2 0.863 -120.
2 0.250 121.
2 0.292 125.
2 0.318 132.
2 0.336 141.
2 0.204 141.
2 0.228 126.
2 0.253 115.

305
A P P E N D I C E S

Index
A E

a radius · 75 eccentricity · vi, xiii, 56, 220, 221, 222, 257,

Advanced phase increments · 215 262, 283, 302
Al Naimiy linear limb darkening tables · vi, eclipses · 209, 212, 214, 216, 230, 232, 243,
208, 270, 285 244, 249, 253, 255, 256, 260
albedo · 39, 209 effective temperature · 207, 208, 255, 301
Algol Paradox · 239, 249 effective wavelength · 37, 207, 244, 256, 301
apastron · ix, 91, 260 email · 299
ascending node · 219, 258 equipotential surface · 56, 201, 202, 206
asynchronous rotation · 3, 50, 74, 90, 257, 262 errors · xvi, 300

B F

barycenter · xii, xiii, xiv, 20, 89, 184, 190, 191, F1 (rotation parameter) · vii, viii, 20, 26, 29,
227, 229, 230, 231, 236, 245, 247, 260 46, 50, 51, 52, 53, 55, 62, 90, 111, 141, 185,
Bibliography · vi, 268 221, 257, 262, 263, 303
Binary window · iii, xii, 20, 40, 53, 68, 82, 184, F2 (rotation parameter) · vii, 20, 26, 29, 50,
185, 187, 189, 190, 192 51, 52, 62, 90, 111, 141, 185, 221, 257, 262,
BM3 file · iii, 34, 47, 48, 256, 266 303
bmd files · 34 F2 function key · 26
breadcrumbs · 20, 184, 190 F3 function key · 26, 141, 143
Factory Default · iv, 70, 71
filling the inner lagrangian surface · 206, 267
C filling the inner Lagrangian surface · 206, 267
fillout · xiii, xv, 36, 74, 75, 203, 204, 205, 206,
C potentials · 74, 80, 81 253, 254, 255, 257, 301
CALEB · vi, xv, 245, 267, 273, 274 flux · ix, 1, 3, 20, 30, 40, 57, 58, 59, 91, 110,
center of mass · xiii, 20, 89, 184, 190, 227 111, 114, 115, 208, 209, 210, 211, 247, 253,
Clear Plot Window · iv, x, xii, 140, 182, 183 304
close · xiv, xvi, 1, 18, 29, 184, 185, 230, 238, focus · 26, 29, 46, 127, 168
244, 247, 248, 261 fractional radii · 75
colatitude · 217, 302
contact binary · xiv, 55, 77, 240, 241
convective · 208, 209, 256 G
critical Roche surfaces · 3, 202, 267
geometry · viii, 72, 73, 299
gravity brightening · 38, 256, 301
D gravity darkening · 38, 263
grid size · xiii, 34, 35, 46, 82, 199, 200, 201,
data files · 3, 20, 21, 33, 34 224, 302
Data Table · iii, viii, 60, 61, 62
Default · iv, x, xii, 70, 71, 138, 180
default scale · ix, x, xi, 20, 26, 29, 90, 111, 113, H
114, 141, 142, 143, 156, 157, 185
detached binary · xiv, 90, 228, 239, 240, 246 Hardware requirements · iii, 5
double contact binary · 55, 77 Hardware Requirements · 5

306
A P P E N D I C E S

Help files · 19, 208, 256 M

Help menu · ix, 79, 97
Macintosh · iii, 1, 5, 6, 11, 16
magnitude · iv, ix, xvi, 2, 3, 20, 110, 111, 210,
I 251, 273, 300
mass · ix, xiii, xiv, 20, 36, 37, 40, 75, 77, 80,
inclination · viii, xiii, xv, 40, 58, 59, 187, 209, 81, 88, 89, 93, 141, 148, 150, 171, 184, 190,
210, 243, 254, 256, 260, 261, 262, 263, 266, 201, 202, 203, 206, 217, 224, 227, 228, 229,
267, 301 230, 231, 232, 236, 238, 239, 244, 249, 256,
inner critical Lagrangian surface · 36 257, 262, 266, 301
Installation · iii, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 11 mass centers · ix, xiv, 20, 40, 75, 93, 148, 150,
184, 190, 206, 217, 227, 228, 229, 230, 231,
K 232
mass ratio · xiii, 36, 37, 75, 80, 81, 88, 201,
K1 · xiv, 146, 235, 236 202, 203, 224, 228, 236, 238, 239, 244, 256,
K2 · xiv, 146, 235, 236 257, 262, 266, 301
mass transfer · 77, 239, 249
maximize · xvi, 18, 31, 71, 143, 185
L mean surface effective temperature · 207, 208
menus · 1, 2, 18, 19, 188
Lab · vi, 9, 11, 12, 267 minimize · xvi, 18
Lab Suggestions · vi, 267
Lagrangian surface · xiv, 36, 55, 75, 81, 88, 90,
203, 206, 207, 230, 238, 239, 240, 241, 242,
N
245, 247, 249, 250, 251, 252, 257
LC Residuals window · viii, 85, 87 near contact binary · xiv, 240
license key · 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12 normalization factor · 302
light centers · xiv, 40, 148, 150, 174, 229, 230, normalization phase · 83, 301
231, 232 normalized radial velocity · 235
light curve · vii, viii, ix, x, xiii, xiv, xv, 1, 2, 3, nrm file · 48, 113, 304
20, 21, 22, 26, 27, 28, 30, 31, 34, 35, 39, 40,
41, 42, 45, 46, 47, 53, 56, 57, 59, 62, 67, 68, O
69, 75, 91, 98, 110, 111, 113, 115, 116, 119,
120, 123, 131, 132, 136, 137, 140, 208, 210, occultation · 223
211, 212, 213, 214, 215, 216, 219, 221, 223, omega potentials · ix, 101, 102
225, 238, 242, 243, 244, 245, 246, 247, 248, outer Lagrangian surface · 81, 90, 206
249, 251, 252, 253, 254, 255, 256, 257, 258, overcontact binary · xiv, xv, 33, 34, 72, 88,
259, 260, 261, 262, 263, 265, 266, 267, 273 113, 230, 241, 242, 253, 254, 255
Light Curve Plot window · iii, iv, vii, viii, ix, x, overlapping spots · v, 218
18, 20, 27, 30, 41, 42, 58, 68, 69, 86, 109,
110, 111, 113, 116, 117, 118, 119, 121, 122,
125, 126, 127, 130, 131, 132, 133, 136, 137, P
138, 139, 140, 256
limb darkening · vii, 38, 39, 208, 244, 256, parameter file · iii, vii, 3, 18, 22, 33, 34, 47, 48,
263, 300, 301 266
limb darkening coefficients · 38, 208, 244, 256 PC · 1, 2
Limitations · vi, 299 penumbra · 219
Linux · iii, 2, 5, 6, 8, 14 periastron · ix, xiii, xv, 56, 57, 58, 59, 81, 90,
longitude of periastron · xiii, 56, 219, 220, 91, 219, 220, 222, 257, 259, 260, 261, 262,
257, 260, 262 302
luminosity · 209 period · 113, 146, 190, 210, 228, 234, 236,
242, 253, 255, 273, 302, 305

307
A P P E N D I C E S

phase · iv, vii, viii, ix, xiii, xv, 2, 3, 4, 20, 30, RV Residuals window · iv, viii, 84, 86, 87
40, 42, 46, 54, 56, 57, 58, 59, 66, 68, 73, 82,
83, 84, 88, 91, 110, 111, 120, 141, 146, 160,
185, 186, 187, 190, 195, 199, 200, 201, 210, S
211, 212, 213, 214, 215, 216, 221, 225, 233,
234, 253, 254, 258, 259, 260, 261, 262, 263, scaling · 29, 64, 113, 115, 143, 156, 158
266, 301, 302, 304, 305 secondary eclipse · viii, xiv, 53, 56, 68, 210,
Phase Control · vii, xii, 29, 30, 68, 83, 187 233, 234, 246, 253, 258, 259, 260, 266
phase increment · xiii, 3, 82, 211, 212, 213, semi-detached binary · ix, xiv, 90, 240
214, 215, 216, 302 semimajor axis · 81, 220, 234
phase increments · xiii, 211, 214, 215, 216 Settings · iv, viii, 12, 13, 60, 68, 69, 70, 71
phase shift · 221 single-step · 30, 67
PostScript · iv, viii, ix, xi, xii, 1, 4, 20, 21, 46, Solaris · iii, xvi, 5, 6, 10, 15
60, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 83, 95, 96, 97, SPARC · iii, 6, 10, 15
111, 120, 146, 151, 152, 153, 154, 160, 185, spectroscopic binaries · 266
187, 188, 189, 211, 216 spot longitude · 302
primary eclipse · vii, 28, 53, 54, 201, 210, 234, spot radius · 217, 302
260 star number · 217
primary star · xiv, 53, 54, 55, 68, 145, 171, Sun circle · xii, xiii, 191, 192, 195
229, 230, 233, 257 Surface Outlines · iv, ix, 84, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93,
94, 95, 96
Surface Outlines window · ix, 90, 94, 95
Q synchronous rotation · iii, vii, 51, 52, 59, 88,
221, 238, 257
Quick Mode · 3, 84 synthetic · vii, x, xi, xii, xiii, xiv, 19, 20, 21, 40,
42, 45, 46, 111, 130, 131, 132, 133, 134, 135,
136, 146, 148, 149, 150, 151, 153, 171, 172,
R 173, 174, 176, 177, 179, 210, 211, 212, 213,
215, 216, 221, 225, 234, 242, 247, 250, 254,
radial velocity · vii, x, xi, xii, xiv, 1, 2, 3, 19, 256, 257, 261, 267
21, 22, 26, 29, 30, 34, 40, 48, 50, 51, 52, 53, systemic velocity · ix, xiv, 29, 106, 137, 146,
54, 55, 56, 58, 60, 61, 111, 141, 142, 143, 234, 235, 236, 237, 302, 305
144, 145, 146, 148, 149, 150, 151, 153, 158,
171, 172, 173, 179, 180, 182, 192, 224, 227,
228, 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, T
244, 262, 265, 266, 273, 305
Radial Velocity Plot window · iii, iv, vii, x, xi, tabbed panes · 18, 50, 98
xii, xiv, 18, 21, 30, 68, 87, 109, 137, 141, Teaching Suggestions · vi, 265
145, 146, 147, 148, 150, 152, 155, 156, 159, technical support · vi, 299
161, 162, 163, 166, 167, 168, 171, 172, 174, temperature factor · 217, 218, 219, 302
178, 179, 180, 181, 182, 227, 228, 229 third light · 256, 263, 301
radiative · 208, 209, 256 tidal distortion · 262
radii · xiii, 75, 81, 206, 218, 219, 244, 299 title bar · 17, 20, 26, 31, 86, 87, 98, 106, 127,
RedHat · iii, 5, 6, 8, 14 141, 168, 185
References · vi, 270
reflection · 39, 209, 256, 263, 301
Render button · vii, xii, 18, 29, 40, 41, 45, 51, U
89, 187
Roche surfaces · 3 umbra · 219
Rossiter effect · viii, xiv, 21, 53, 55, 56, 230, Uninstall · iii, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
232, 233 Unix · 2, 5
rotation · 3, 18, 21, 50, 51, 52, 54, 59, 74, 88, user function keys · 62, 111
90, 221, 222, 233, 238, 257, 262, 299, 302 User Input window · iii, vii, ix, xii, xiii, xiv, 17,
rv file · vi, 34, 146, 156, 305 18, 19, 22, 29, 30, 33, 34, 42, 44, 47, 50, 55,

308
A P P E N D I C E S

56, 60, 63, 69, 72, 79, 82, 88, 97, 100, 111, windows · iv, vii, viii, 2, 12, 13, 17, 18, 22, 26,
186, 187, 211, 223, 235 30, 31, 34, 64, 68, 71, 84, 85, 86, 90, 109,
141, 152
WR20a · xv, 265, 266
V

velocity semiamplitude · xiv, 146, 190, 234, Z

235, 236, 302, 305
Vo · 235, 302 zero point of phase · 260, 302
volumes · 56, 81, 201 Zip file · iii, vii, 3, 22, 25, 26, 33, 34, 48, 49,
111, 142, 267
Zip folder · vi, vii, 23, 24, 50, 55, 56, 60, 62,
W 245, 274, 280, 283
zoom · 20, 26, 28, 46, 90, 111, 141, 144, 263
W UMa systems · 201
Wilson-Devinney program · 75, 206, 216, 217

309